CA3042871A1

CA3042871A1 - Information-presentation structure with temporary color change at objet-impact area

Info

Publication number: CA3042871A1
Application number: CA3042871A
Authority: CA
Inventors: Ronald J. Meetin
Original assignee: Individual
Current assignee: Individual
Priority date: 2016-11-03
Filing date: 2017-10-23
Publication date: 2018-05-11
Also published as: EP3535034A2; WO2018085073A3; EP3535034A4; WO2018085073A2; AU2017355301B2; AU2022205247A1; EP3535034B1; AU2017355301A1

Abstract

Suitable impact of an object (104) on an exposed surface (102) of an object-impact structure (100) of an information-presentation structure during an activity such as a sport causes the surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. Specifically, a variable-color region (106) of the Ol structure extends to the surface at a surface zone (112) and normally appears along it as a principal color. An impact-dependent portion (138) of the variable-color region responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent object-contact area (116) by temporarily appearing along an impact-dependent print area (118) of the zone as changed color materially different from the principal color if certain conditions are met. The print area closely matches the object-contact area in size, shape, and location.

Description

DEMANDE OU BREVET VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND
PLUS D'UN TOME.

NOTE : Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des brevets JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE
VOLUME

NOTE: For additional volumes, please contact the Canadian Patent Office NOM DU FICHIER / FILE NAME:
NOTE POUR LE TOME / VOLUME NOTE:

INFORMATION-PRESENTATION STRUCTURE
WITH TEMPORARY COLOR CHANGE AT OBJECT-IMPACT AREA
By Ronald J. Meetin FIELD OF USE
[0001] This invention relates to information presentation, especially for sports such as tennis.
BACKGROUND

[0002] Two sides, each consisting of at least one player, compete against each other in a typical sport played with an object, such as a ball, which moves above a playing surface and often impacts the surface.
Exemplary sports include tennis and basketball. The playing surface, referred to as a court, consists of an inbounds (IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ('OB") playing area demarcated by boundary lines. When the object impacts the OB area, the side that caused the object to go out of bounds is typically penalized. In tennis, a point is awarded to the other side. In basketball, possession of the basketball is awarded to the other side. Decisions as to whether the object impacts the playing surface in or out of bounds are often difficult to make for impacts close to the boundary lines.

[0003] Additionally, the 1B area typically contains internal lines that place certain requirements on the sport. For instance, a tennis court contains three internal lines which, together with the tennis net and a pair of the boundary lines, define four servicecourts into which a tennis ball must be appropriately served to avoid a penalty against the server. It is often difficult to determine whether a served tennis ball impacting the playing surface close to one of these lines is "in" or "out". Each half of a basketball court usually has a three-point line.
At least one shoe of a player shooting the basketball must contact the court behind the three-point line immediately prior to the shot with neither of the shooter's shoes touching the court on or inside the three-point line as the shot is taken for it to be eligible for three points. It is likewise difficult to determine whether this requirement is met when the shoes are close to the three-point line.

[0004] Returning to tennis, Fig. 1 illustrates the layout of playing surface 20 of a standard tennis court with line width somewhat exaggerated. For singles, playing surface 20 consists of rectangular IB playing area 22 and OB playing area 24 edgewise surrounding IB playing area 22 and extending to court boundary 26. Singles IB playing area 22 is defined inwardly by two opposite equal-width parallel straight baselines 28 and two opposite equal-width parallel straight singles sidelines 30 extending between baselines 28. Tennis net 32 is situated above a straight net line, usually imaginary but potentially real, extending parallel to baselines 28 substantially midway between them and extending lengthwise between and beyond singles sidelines 30 for dividing singles 1B area 22 into two singles half courts.

[0005] Singles 1B area 22 contains (i) two opposite equal-width parallel straight servicelines 34 situated between baselines 28 and extending lengthwise between singles sidelines 30 at equal distances from the imaginary or real net line and (ii) straight centerline 36 extending lengthwise between servicelines 34 at equal distances from singles sidelines 30. Lines 30, 34, and 36 in combination with the imaginary/real net line, and thus effectively net 32, define inwardly four equal-size rectangular services courts 38. Lines 28, 30, and 34 define two equal-size rectangular backcourts 40.

[0006] Playing surface 20 for doubles consists of IB playing area 42 and OB
playing area 44 edgewise surrounding IB playing area 42 and extending to court boundary 26. Doubles IB
playing area 42 is defined inwardly by baselines 28 and opposite equal-width straight doubles sidelines 46 located outside singles IB area 22. The imaginary/real net line situated below net 32 extends lengthwise between and beyond doubles sidelines 46 for dividing doubles IB area 42 into two doubles half courts. Net 32 extends fully across 1B area 42 and into OB area 44. Rectangular doubles alleys 48 extend along doubles sidelines 46 outside singles sidelines 30. Fig.
2 is a less-labeled version of Fig. 1 in which roughly elliptical items 50, of somewhat exaggerated size, represent examples of areas where tennis balls, including just-served tennis balls, contact playing surface 20 and which are variously so close to the tennis lines that it may be difficult to make decisions, referred to as "line calls", on whether the balls are "in" or "out".

[0007] Players and tennis officials variously make line calls in tennis depending on the availability of officials. Numerous devices, including camera-based devices, have been investigated to assist in making line calls. One notable camera-based device is the Hawk-Eye system in which a group of video cameras in conjunction with a computer track moving tennis balls to provide simulations of their trajectories and predictions of their court contact areas. See Geiger, "How Tennis Can Save Soccer: Hawk-Eye Crossing Sports", Illumin, 25 Mar. 2013,3 pp. Fig. 3 illustrates an example of simulated trajectory 60 of tennis ball 62 tracked with Hawk-Eye on one stroke. Fig. 4 depicts simulated contact area 64 of ball 62 near a sideline 30 on another stroke. As Fig. 4 indicates, Hawk-Eye provides a visual notification specifying whether ball 62 is in or out.

[0008] The Hawk-Eye simulations are displayed on a screen at which players (and officials) look to see the line calls. This disrupts play. As a result, Hawk-Eye is used for only certain line calls. In particular, officials initially make all line calls with each side allocated a small number of opportunities to challenge official-made calls per set provided that a challenge opportunity is retained if an official-made call is reversed. The use of challenges is distracting to the players. Hawk-Eye's accuracy depends on the accuracy of the predictive data analysis for the simulations and on Hawk-Eye's alignment to the tennis lines, assumed to be perfectly straight even though they are not perfectly straight. Hawk-Eye appears to occasionally make erroneous calls as WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 discussed, e.g., in "Hawk-Eye", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.orgiwikilHawk-Eye, 18 July 2013, 8 pp. While Hawk-Eye has gained high recognition among the camera-based devices, it is desirable to have a better device than Hawk-Eye or any other camera-based device for making line calls.

[0009] Line-calling systems utilizing tennis balls with special electrical or chemical treatments have been proposed as, e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patents 4,109,911 and 7,632,197 B2.
However, such systems are disadvantageous for various reasons. Erosion along the outside of a specially treated tennis ball as it contacts the tennis court and racquets may detrimentally affect the ball's ability to provide the information needed to appropriately communicate with the line-calling system. The electrical or chemical treatments may so affect the bounce characteristics that some tennis players are averse to using specially treated balls. Players and officials are generally unable to rapidly verify the accuracy of the calls.

[0010] The possibility of using piezochromic material in making line calls has been raised, A piezochromic material changes color upon applying suitable pressure and returns to the original color upon releasing the pressure. In Bradley, "Interview with Williams James Griffiths", Reactive Reports, June 2006, 3 pp., Griffiths proposes a thin device to be laid on a tennis court and to contain piezochromic material that changes color upon being impacted by a tennis ball. Griffiths mentions that (i) the piezochromic material would have to be shielded from ultraviolet radiation because piezochromic materials are ultraviolet sensitive and most tennis courts are outdoors and (ii) piezochromic materials generally undergo reverse color change too quickly for a person to check an impact location. Ferrara et al., "Intelligent design with chromogenic materials", J. Intl Colour Ass'n, val. 13, 2014, pp. 54 - 66, similarly proposes that electrochromic paint be applied at and near the lines of a tennis court for assistance in making line calls and that the same paint could be used for basketball, volleyball, and squash courts.

[0011] Tennis players are usually close to baselines 28 during much of a tennis match. The players' shoes would likely cause color changes near baselines 28 in a tennis court using the piezochromic material of Griffith or Ferrara et al. Shoe-caused color changes would sometimes partially or fully overlap ball-caused color changes and thereby degrade the ability of using ball-caused color changes in making line calls.

[0012] Charlson et al., International Patent Publication WO 2011/123515, discloses a "piezochromic"
device, perhaps better described as an electrowefting device, which changes color in response to a force. One embodiment is a sports tape for determining whether a tennis ball is in or out. Other devices using pressure/force sensing have been investigated for assistance in making line calls as disclosed in, e.g., U.S.
Patents 3,415,517, 3,982,759, 4,365,805, 4,855,711, and 4,859,986. Line-calling devices using other technologies have also been investigated as, e.g., described in "Electronic line judge", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electronic___line judge_(tennis), 19 June 2012, 3 pp.
These other line-calling devices are impractical for one reason or another. It is desirable for tennis and other sports needing fast line calls to have a practical line-calling device or system which overcomes the disadvantages of prior art line-calling systems.

GENERAL DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION

[0013] The present invention furnishes an information-presentation structure in which suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an object-impact ("01") structure during an activity such as a sport causes the surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. Specifically, a variable-color ("VC") region of the 01 structure extends to the surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it as a principal color, An impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID
object-contact ('OC") area by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the zone as changed color materially different from the principal color if certain conditions, described below, are met The print area closely matches the 00 area in size, shape, and location.

[0014] The components of the VC region in a first facet (or expression) of the invention include a color-change ("CC") component and an impact-sensitive ("IS") component usually at least partially situated between the surface zone and the CC component. An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing the ID
portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color.

[0015] Use of separate IS and CC components provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of jointly performing them. The ambit of colors for implementing the principal and changed colors is increased. The two colors can be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the IS
component, usually largely transparent, without changing the CC component. The ruggedness for withstanding object impacts is enhanced thereby enabling the lifetime to be increased. The ability to select and control the color-change timing is improved.

[0016] With the object subsequently leaving the surface zone, the color change at the print area usually occurs very quickly. The full forward transition delay from when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID portion approximately first appears as the changed color is usually no more than 0.2 s.

[0017] The CC component often contains an electrode assembly in which a core layer lies at least partially between a near electrode structure and a far electrode structure situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure. Light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for the principal color normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode structure. A CC
control signal provided by the VC
region in response to the impact effect is applied between locations in the near and far electrode structures. At least one of these locations depends on where the object contacts the surface zone. An ID segment of the core layer responds to the control signal by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for color different from the principal color to temporarily leave an ID
segment of the core layer along an ID

segment of the near electrode structure such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area as the changed color.

[0018] Instead of having the ID segment of the CC component respond directly to the impact effect if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID segment of the IS component in a second facet of the invention provides a characteristics-identifying ('Cl) impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information for the impact. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The supplemental impact criteria are typically used for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color change is not desired. The ID segment of the CC
component responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID
portion to temporarily appear as the changed color. With the object subsequently leaving the surface zone, the full forward transition delay from when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID
portion approximately first appears as the changed color is preferably no more than 0.2 s so that the color change at the print area occurs very quickly.

[0019] The CC component again typically contains an electrode assembly in which a core layer lies at least partially between a near electrode structure and a far electrode structure situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure. Light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for the principal color again normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode structure. In this case, the CC
controller responds to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria and, if so, by providing the CC initiation signal applied between a location in the near electrode structure and a location in the far electrode structure.

[0020] The VC region contains impact-sensitive color-change ('ISCC") structure in a third facet of the invention where the shape of the OC area is capable of being arbitrary. A
protective structure lies at least partially between the surface zone and the ISCC structure for protecting it from being damaged by mailer impacting, situated on, and/or moving along the zone. The protective structure also preferably blocks at least 80% of externally incident ultraviolet radiation.

[0021] In a fourth facet of the invention where the principal color is referred to as a principal surface color, a surface structure lies between the surface zone and an interface with the ISCC structure. The total light normally leaving the ISCC structure along the interface is of wavelength suitable for forming a principal internal color. When the ID portion temporarily appears as the changed color referred to here as the changed surface color, the total light temporarily leaving an ID segment of the interface spanning the ID portion along the interface is of wavelength suitable for forming a changed internal color. One of the internal colors is a comparatively light color. The other is a comparatively dark color. The surface structure absorbs light leaving the ISCC structure along the interface such that the principal surface color is darker than the light color if the principal internal color is the light color and such that the changed surface color is darker than the light color if the changed internal color is the light color. This light/dark color arrangement advantageously enables the colors implementing the principal and changed surface colors to be significantly varied by changing the light absorption characteristics of the surface structure without changing the ISCC
structure. The principal and changed surface colors can also be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the surface structure without changing the 1SCC structure.

[0022] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID segment of the ISCC structure in a fifth facet of the invention provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The supplemental impact criteria are again typically used for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts for which color change is not desired. Except as otherwise explained, the same applies to supplemental impact criteria described in later facets of the invention. The ID
segment of the ISCC structure responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.

[0023] The VC region in a sixth facet of the invention includes pressure-sensitive color-change ("PSCC") structure and pressure-spreading structure lying at least partially between the surface zone and the PSCC
structure. The pressure-spreading structure has a largely internal pressure-spreading surface spaced apart from the surface zone. With the shape of the OC area being capable of being arbitrary, the pressure-spreading structure laterally spreads pressure of the impact along a corresponding ID
distributed-pressure area of the pressure-spreading surface. The distributed-pressure area laterally outwardly conforms to, and is laterally larger than, the OC area. An ID segment of the PSCC structure responds to the resultant excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area meets excess internal pressure criteria, excess pressure at any location being pressure in excess of normal pressure at that location.

[0024] In the absence of the pressure-spreading structure, the print and OC
areas would generally be separated by a band which largely remains the principal color because the excess surface pressure along the band is insufficient to meet excess surface pressure criteria for causing color change. Since (a) the pressure-spreading surface is largely internal to the 01 structure, (b) the pressure criteria which must be met to cause color change are excess internal pressure criteria along the pressure-spreading surface rather than excess surface pressure criteria along the exposed surface, and (c) the pressure spreading causes the excess internal pressure to be laterally distributed more widely than the excess surface pressure caused directly by the impact, the thickness of the band largely remaining the principal color can be made very small. The print area can thereby match the OC area very closely in size, shape, and location. The principal and changed colors can also be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the pressure-spreading structure without changing the PSCC structure.

[0025] Instead of having the ID portion change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the excess internal pressure criteria, the ID segment of the PSCC structure in a seventh facet of the invention provides a Cl impact signal if the excess internal pressure criteria are met.
The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The ID segment of the PSCC structure responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.

[0026] The VC region in an eighth facet of the invention includes ISCC
structure and duration-extension ("DE") structure. The ID segment of the ISCC structure responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. The ID portion subsequently returns to appearing along the print area as the principal color.

[0027] The impact causes deformation along an ID surface deformation area of the surface zone as the ID
portion initially appears along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. In addition, the DE structure responds to the impact by causing the ISCC structure to deform along an ID internal deformation area spaced apart from the surface deformation area.
This internal deformation causes the ID portion to further temporarily appear along the print area as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met. The duration of the ID portion appearing as the changed color is thereby extended in a controllable manner.

[0028] The ID portion in a ninth facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area, whose shape is capable of being arbitrary, by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area as the changed color. Using light emission to produce the temporary color change at the print area is advantageous because the changed color can be virtually any possible visible color. Additionally, the print area can be quite bright, thereby enhancing visibility of the color change, particularly in dark ambient environments. Piezoluminescent or/and piezochromic luminescent material in the VC region preferably provides light emission that produces the temporary color change.

[0029] Rather than have the print area change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a tenth facet of the invention provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears as changed color.

[0030] The VC region in an eleventh facet of the invention contains multiple VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a corresponding part of the surface zone. The cells normally appear along their parts of the surface zone as the principal color. Each cell that meets threshold impact criteria in response to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area, whose shape is capable of being arbitrary, temporarily becomes a criteria-meeting ("CM") cell that temporarily appears along its part of the surface zone as the changed color.

[0031] The cell architecture is highly advantageous. The boundary of the print area defined by the cell surface parts is clear. The color changes along the surface part of each CM
cell without the color changing along the surface part of any neighboring cell not intended to undergo color change. The ambit of materials suitable for implementing the 01 structure is increased because there is no need to limit the VC region to materials for which the effect of the impact does not laterally spread significantly beyond the OC area.
Essentially any desired print accuracy can be achieved by adjusting the cell density. If the threshold impact criteria are to vary along the surface zone, neighboring cells can readily be provided with different threshold impact criteria.

[0032] Each cell preferably includes an IS part and a CC part. The IS part of each CM cell responds to the impact by providing a cellular impact effect. The CC part of each CM cell responds to its impact effect by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone as the changed color. Use of separate IS and CC parts in each cell provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of jointly performing them.
The ambit of colors for implementing the principal and changed colors is increased. The two colors can be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the IS parts, usually largely transparent, without changing the CC
parts. The ruggedness for withstanding object impacts is enhanced thereby enabling the lifetime to be increased. The ability to select and control the CC timing is improved.

[0033] Instead of having cells that meet the threshold impact criteria change color directly in response to the impact, each cell meeting the threshold impact criteria in response to the impact in a twelfth facet of the invention temporarily become a threshold CM cell that provides a Cl impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information of the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell.
Responsive to the Cl impact signal of each threshold CM cell, a CC controller combines the cellular supplemental information of that threshold CM cell with the cellular supplemental information of any other threshold CM cell to form general supplemental impact information. The CC
controller then determines whether the general supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria, and, if so, provides a cellular WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 CC initiation signal to each threshold CM cell for causing it to become a full CM cell and temporarily appear as the changed color.

[0034] With the ID portion subsequently returning to appearing as the principal color, the CC duration of the ID portion temporarily appearing as the changed color is, in the absence of externally caused adjustment, substantially in a CC time duration range established prior to the impact. In a thirteenth facet of the invention, a CC controller responds to the impact and to subsequent instruction by controlling the ID portion for adjusting the CC duration subsequent to the impact. The instruction for controlling the CC
duration can be manually provided, directly or remotely, to the controller. The CC-control instruction can also be provided, directly or remotely, by human voice to the controller.

[0035] The ID portion in a fourteenth facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing a Cl impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria without necessarily being subject to any of the particular limitations of the preceding second, fifth, seventh, and tenth facets of the invention and the later sixteenth, twentieth, twenty-second, twenty-fourth, twenty-seventh, twenty-eighth, thirtieth, thirty-second, thirty-fourth; thirty-sixth; thirty-eighth, fortieth, and forty-third facets of the invention. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for an ID
print area in the surface zone and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color. The supplemental impact criteria enable the IP structure to largely avoid providing color change at the locations of impacts of bodies for which color change is not desired.

[0036] The supplemental impact information and criteria can be implemented various ways. For instance, the supplemental impact criteria can include size and/or shape criteria for the print area. The size criteria preferably include a maximum reference area value for the print area. The controller then provides the ID
portion with the CC initiation signal substantially only when the print area is expected to be of an area less than or equal to the maximum reference area value. The size criteria can include a minimum reference area value for the print area if it is located substantially fully in the surface zone. If so, the controller provides the ID portion with the initiation signal when the print area is expected to be of an area greater than or equal to the minimum reference area value provided that the print area is expected to be located substantially fully in the surface zone.

[0037] The shape criteria can include (a) a reference shape for the print area and (b) a shape parameter set consisting of at least one shape parameter defining variations from the reference shape. In this case, the controller provides the ID portion with the CC initiation signal substantially only when the print area has a shape expected to fall within the shape parameter set. The supplemental impact information can include the duration of the object in contact with the OC area. The supplemental impact criteria then include OC duration criteria, e.g., a maximum reference duration value. The controller provides the ID
portion with the initiation signal only WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 when the duration of the object in contact with the OC area is less than or equal to the maximum reference OC
duration value.

[0038] An image-generating ("IC') controller responds to the impact in a fifteenth facet of the invention by causing an 1G structure to generate a principal print-area vicinity ("PAV") image of the print area and adjacent surface extending to at least a selected location of the exposed surface if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. The PAV image helps determine how close the impact occurred to the selected surface location. The PAV image is preferably automatically generated whenever a point in the print area is less than or equal to a selected distance away from (including being in) the selected surface location. The IC controller also preferably responds to external instruction for causing the IC structure to generate the PAV image if the threshold impact criteria are met.

[0039] The boundary of the surface zone and the perimeter of the print area commonly have irregularities that make it difficult to determine how close the print area comes to the surface-zone boundary. These difficulties are overcome with an image-smoothening capability that removes these irregularities in a PAV image and thereby assists in determining how close the print area conies to the surface-zone boundary. In particular, the IP structure provides an approximation capability for (a) determining a portion of the surface-zone boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at feast that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.

[0040] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a sixteenth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, generates a CC initiation signal.
The VC region responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed color.

[0041] In seventeenth, eighteenth, and nineteenth facets of the invention, an object-tracking COT") control apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface. As the object impacts the surface zone at the OC area, the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area of the zone as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria and if the tracking indicates that the object is highly likely to impact the OC area. Impacts of bodies not tracked by the OT control apparatus substantially do not cause color change. Color change thus occurs largely only for suitable impacts of the tracked object.

[0042] The VC region in the invention's seventeenth facet is capable of being enabled for, and is ordinarily disabled from being capable of, changing color. The OT control apparatus estimates where the object is WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934 expected to contact the surface according to the tracking and provides a CC
enable signal shortly before the impact occurs if the tracking indicates that the object is expected to contact the surface zone. The CC enable signal at least partially identifies the estimated OC area in the surface zone. Responsive to the enable signal, an oversize portion of the VC region extending to an oversize area of the surface zone is temporarily enabled to be capable of changing color. The oversize area encompasses and extends beyond the estimated OC area.
The ID portion, now temporarily enabled to be capable of changing color due because it is included in the oversize portion of the VC region, responds to the impact by temporarily appearing as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met.

[0043] In the invention's eighteenth facet, the OT control apparatus provides a CC control signal during at least part of a CC initiation time period extending from when the object impacts the surface zone to when the object subsequently leaves the zone according to the tracking. The ID portion responds to the control signal and to the impact by temporarily appearing as the changed color if the threshold impact criteria are met.

[0044] The ID portion in the invention's nineteenth facet responds to the object impacting the OC area by providing a location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The LI impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area in the surface zone. The OT
control apparatus estimates where the object contacted the exposed surface according to the tracking, provides an estimation impact signal indicative of estimated OC area in the surface zone if the estimated contact is at least partially in the surface zone, compares the LI and estimation impact signals, and provides a CC
initiation signal if the comparison indicates that the estimated OC area and the print area at least partially overlap. The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing as the changed color.

[0045] The print area satisfies, in a twentieth facet of the invention, one of a plurality of mutually exclusive criteria for the location of the print area in the surface zone. The location criteria encompass the entire surface zone and respectively correspond to a like plurality of specific changed colors materially different from the principal color. Two or more of the specific changed colors differ from one another.

[0046] Responsive to an LI impact signal provided by the ID portion if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, a CC controller determines which location criterion is satisfied by the print area and then provides a CC initiation signal at a corresponding condition. The LI impact signal can be replaced with a Cl impact signal that also identifies supplemental impact information. In that case, the controller further determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the specific changed color for the location criterion met by the print area. The invention thereby enables the ID portion to appear along the print area as one of two or more colors depending on where the impact occurs.

[0047] The changed color is a generic changed color in a twenty-first facet of the invention where the threshold impact criteria are formed with multiple sets of different threshold impact criteria respectively WO 2018/085073 PCT/U S2017/(157934 associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color. The impact of the object on the surface zone is potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets. If the object impact meets the threshold impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set actually met by the impact.

[0048] Instead of having the ID portion change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the VC region in a twenty-second facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CO
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing as the generic changed color. The supplemental impact criteria consist of multiple sets of different supplemental impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color. The supplemental impact information is potentially capable of meeting any of the supplemental criteria sets. If the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set actually met by the supplemental impact information.

[0049] Use of threshold and supplemental impact criteria sets provides a capability to distinguish between different types of object impacts. For example, if the maximum excess surface pressure usually exerted by one implementation of the object on the surface zone exceeds the minimum excess surface pressure usually exerted by another implementation of the object on the surface zone, suitable choice of the threshold impact criteria sets enables the IP structure to distinguish between impacts of the two object implementations. Similarly, if one implementation of the object is shaped considerably differently than another implementation of the object or usually contacts the surface zone for a considerably different time duration than the other object implementation, suitable choice of the supplemental impact criteria sets enables the IP
structure to distinguish between the two object implementations as they contact the surface zone.

[0050] In a twenty-third facet of the invention, sound-generating apparatus selectively generates a specified audible sound in response to the object impacting the OC area so as to meet the threshold impact criteria. The specified sound is separate from any audible sound originating at the OC area due physically to (sound waves caused by) the impact. The VC region usually provides an impact signal in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria. The sound-generating apparatus then generates the specified sound in response to the impact signal.

[0051] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a twenty-fourth facet of the invention provides a CI impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, generates a specified audible sound and provides a CC initiation signal. The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.

[0052] The principal and changed colors are chosen to accommodate persons having color vision deficiency, commonly termed color blindness, in twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth facets of the invention. In the invention's twenty-fifth facet, the principal and changed colors differ materially as viewed by persons having the most common color vision deficiencies of dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy.
Dichromacy, divided into protanopia, deuteranopia, and tritanopia, occurs when a human eye lacks one of the three types of cone pigments. Anomalous trichromacy, divided into protanomaly, deuteranomaly, and tritanomaly, occurs when one of the eye's three cone pigments is altered in spectral sensitivity.

[0053] In the invention's twenty-sixth facet, a selected one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the light spectrum in order to accommodate persons having the predominant red-green color vision deficiencies, namely protanopia, deuteranopia, protanamaly, and deuteranomaly. The remaining one of the principal and changed colors is preferably restricted from being any color from violet to yellow in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from violet to yellow in the light spectrum in order to also accommodate persons having the lesser common blue-yellow color vision deficiencies of tritanomaly and tritanopia.

[0054] Instead of having the print area change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the VC region in twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth facets of the invention provides a CI
impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
In the invention's twenty-seventh facet, the principal and changed colors differ materially as viewed by persons having dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy. In the invention's twenty-eighth facet, a selected one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum.

[0055] The activity in the preceding twenty-eight facets of the invention can be tennis in which the object is a tennis ball. If so, the 01 structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface has two baselines, two sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged conventionally. Each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline nearest that baseline define a backcourt so as to establish two backcourts. The present CC capability can be incorporated into various parts of the tennis court For instance, the surface zone can be constituted with two VC backcourt area portions which partly occupy the backcourts and respectively adjoin the servicelines along largely their entire lengths. The CC capability then helps determine whether served tennis balls are "in" or "our.

[0056] The CC capability in the invention's preceding twenty-eight facets enables a viewer to readily visually determine where the object impacted the exposed surface. The accuracy in determining the location of the print area is very high. A tennis player playing on a tennis court having the CC capability can, in the vast majority of instances, visually see whether a tennis ball impacting the court near a tennis line is "in" or "out".
Both the need to use challenges for reviewing line calls and the delay for line-call review are greatly reduced.
The CC capability can be used in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball, football, and baseball/softball. While often a ball, the object can be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a person. The CC capability can also be used in activities other than sports.

[0057] In twenty-ninth and thirtieth facets of the invention directed specifically to tennis, suitable impact of an object, typically a tennis ball, on an exposed surface of an 01 structure used in playing tennis causes the surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. The exposed surface consists of an in-bounds ("IB") playing area and a surrounding out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area. The IB area has two baselines, two (singles) sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged conventionally. A tennis net is situated above an imaginary or real net line located midway between the baselines. A backcourt is defined by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts. Four servicecourts are defined by the sidelines, the servicelines, the centerline, and the net line.

[0058] The 01 structure contains (a) two VC line-adjoining ("LA") backcourt ("BC") structure portions extending to the exposed surface at two LA BC area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines, (b) four VC servicecourt ("SC") structure portions extending to the exposed surface respectively at four LA SC area portions partly occupying the servicecourts and adjoining the centerline, and/or (c) two VC OB structure portions extending to the exposed surface at two LA OB
area portions partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively adjoining the baselines. Each LA BC structure portion, if present, normally appears along its LA BC area portion as a principal BC color. Each LA SC structure portion, if present, normally appears along its LA SC area portion as a principal SC color. Each LA OB structure portion, if present, normally appears along its LA OB area portion as a principal OB color.

[0059] Each LA structure portion in the 01 structure of the invention's twenty-ninth facet includes an IS
component and a CC component. An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the LA
area portion of that LA structure portion at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure portion to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area portion as changed color materially different from the principal color of that LA
structure portion. The print area of each LA
area portion closely matches its OC area. When the object is a tennis ball, the color change at each print area enables viewers, such as the tennis players and any official(s), to readily visually determine where the tennis ball impacted the exposed surface and thus to determine rapidly whether the ball impacted "in" or "out". Use of separate IS and CC components in each LA structure portion in the 01 structure provides the benefits for the invention's first facet

[0060] Rather than have each LA structure portion in the 01 structure change color directly in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID portion of that structure portion in the invention's thirtieth facet provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area of that structure portion and supplemental impact information, Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The ID portion of that structure portion responds to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed color.

[0061] The supplemental impact criteria are preferably characteristic of a tennis ball impacting the exposed surface. For instance, the supplemental impact criteria can include size and/or shape criteria for each print area as impacted by a tennis ball. Alternatively or additionally, the supplemental impact information can include time duration of the object in contact with each OC area. The supplemental impact criteria then include OC duration criteria for a tennis ball impacting each VC area portion. Use of supplemental impact criteria characteristic of a tennis ball impacting the exposed surface enables the P
structure to distinguish between impacts of tennis balls and impacts of other bodies, such the shoes of the tennis players, and thus to provide color change substantially only for tennis ball impacts.

[0062] In thirty-first, thirty-second, thirty-third, and thirty-fourth facets of the invention, suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an 01 structure of a sports-playing structure causes the exposed surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. The object can be a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person. The exposed surface consists of (a) an 1B
area defined by a closed boundary and (b) a surrounding OB area. A closed boundary line extends along the closed boundary and has opposite inside and outside edges, one of which is situated in one of the 1B and OB
areas and the other of which meets the other of the IB and OB areas.

[0063] The 01 structure in the invention's thirty-first and thirty-second facets contains VC inside-edge boundary-vicinity ("By") LA structure extending to the surface at inside-edge LA area situated in the 18 area and adjoining the inside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length or/and (b) VC outside-edge BV LA
structure extending to the surface at outside-edge LA area situated in the OB
area and adjoining the outside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length. Each BV LA
structure normally appears along its LA
area as a normal-state BV LA color if that LA structure is present in the 01 structure. The inside-edge LA
structure is present if the boundary line, including its outside edge, is in the OB area. Similarly, the outside-edge LA structure is present if the boundary line, including its inside edge, is in the 1B area.

[0064] Each BV LA structure in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-first facet includes IS and CC
components. An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA
structure at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. An ID
segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area as changed-state BV
LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA structure. Use of separate IS and CC
components provides the above-described benefits.

[0065] The ID portion of each BV LA structure in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-second facet responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC
area by providing a Cl impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The ID portion of each LA structure responds to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed-state BV LA color.

[0066] In the invention's thirty-third and thirty-fourth facets, the IB
area has at least one finite-width internal line having a pair of opposite edges. The 01 structure contains, for each internal line, VC internal LA structure extending to the surface at LA area adjoining a selected one of the edges of that internal line at least partly along its length. Each internal LA structure normally appears along its LA
area as a normal-state internal LA
color if that LA structure is in the 01 structure. Each internal LA structure in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-third facet includes IS and CC components. An ID segment of the IS
component responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. An ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area as changed-state internal LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA
structure,

[0067] The ID portion of each internal LA structure in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-fourth facet responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC
area by providing a CI impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. The CI impact signal identifies an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The ID portion of each LA structure responds to its initiation signal by temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed-state internal LA color. Upon implementing the supplemental impact criteria as characteristic of a person's shoe impacting the exposed surface, this inventive aspect serves to help determine whether shots taken near the three-point lines in basketball qualify for three points and whether violations of the attack lines occur in volleyball.

[0068] Suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an 01 structure used in playing football for thirty-fifth and thirty-sixth facets of the invention and baseball or softball for thirty-seventh and thirty-eighth facets of the invention causes the exposed surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. In football, the object is football or a person including any clothing, e.g., shoe, worn by the person. The exposed surface for football consists of an IB area and an OB area having two end lines and two side lines extending between the end lines to define the IB area. Each end or side line is an open boundary line having inside and outside edges respectively meeting the 1B area and situated in the OB area.

[0069] The football 01 structure includes (a) two VC inside-edge end-line-adjoining ("ELA") structure parts extending to the surface at two inside-edge ELA area parts in the IB area so as to adjoin the inside edges of the end lines, (b) two VC inside-edge side-line-adjoining ("SLA") structure parts extending to the surface at two inside-edge SLA area parts in the IB area so as to adjoin the inside edges of the side lines, (c) two VC end-line structure parts extending to the surface at the end lines, and/or (d) two VC
side-line structure parts extending to the surface at the side lines. Each ELA or SLA structure part, if present, is a VC LA structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") color. Each end-line or side-line structure part, if present, is a VC line structure part normally appearing along its open boundary line as an additional ("AD") color. Each boundary and the adjoining LA area part, if present, are usually situated on hard material of a path.

[0070] An ID portion of each LA or line structure part in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-fifth facet responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure part at an ID
OC area by temporarily appearing along a closely matching ID print area of that area part as changed or altered color materially different from that structure parts PP or AD color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
The ID portion of each LA or line structure part in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-sixth facet provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area and supplemental information for the impact. A CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the ID portion of that LA or line structure part with a CC initiation signal that causes that ID portion to temporarily appear along its print area as its changed or altered color.

[0071] In baseball or softball, the object is a baseball or softball. The exposed surface consists of (a) a fair area defined by an outfield barrier and two perpendicular foul lines having parts that extend up the barrier, (b) the inside area of the barrier, and (c) a foul area adjoining the fair area along the foul lines. The fair area consists of a general infield area and a general outfield area both of which include parts of each foul line. The foul area includes (a) two foul-territory ("ELT) dirt area sections extending from home plate along the foul lines beyond their bases partway to the barrier and (b) two FLT grass area sections extending from the FLT dirt area sections along the foul lines at least partway to the barrier. A main outfield foul-line part of each foul line extends from the dirt infield area at least partway to the barrier.

[0072] The baseball/softball 01 structure includes (a) two VC main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure parts extending to the surface at two main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area parts adjoining the main outfield foul-line parts and/or (b) two VC main outfield foul-line structure parts extending to the surface at the main outfield foul-line parts. Each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure part, if present, normally appears along its LA
area part as a PP outfield color. Each main outfield foul-line structure part, if present, normally appears along its foul-line part as an AD outfield color. Two channels usually extend down to hard material in grass along the foul lines. When the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure parts are present, the channels extend respectively into the FLT grass area sections so that the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA
area parts are situated along the hard material.

[0073] An ID portion of each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-seventh facet responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure part at an ID 00 area by temporarily appearing along a closely matching ID print area of that area part as changed or aitered outfield color materially different from that structure part's PP or AD outfield color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. The ID portion of each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-eighth facet provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location of the print area and supplemental information for the impact. A CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the ID
portion of that FLT LA or foul-line structure part with a CC initiation signal that causes its ID portion to temporarily appear along its print area as its changed or altered outfield color. Impacts on and near the remaining parts of the foul lines beyond their bases, including the barrier parts, are preferably handled in the same way as the main outfield foul-line parts.

[0074] The 01 structure in thirty-ninth and fortieth facets of the invention contains a principal VC region and a secondary region extending to the exposed surface respectively at adjoining principal and secondary surface zones. The principal region has the characteristics described above. The secondary region fixedly appears along the secondary surface zone as a secondary color. Hence, impact of the object on the secondary zone does not cause it to significantly change color at the impact area of the secondary zone. The object is spherical here.

[0075] After impacting either surface zone, the object rebounds from that zone. The object impacts each surface zone with an incident linear vector velocity and an incident angular vector velocity and rebounds from each zone with a rebound linear vector velocity and a rebound angular vector velocity. Each surface zone has a coefficient of orthogonal velocity restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound orthogonal velocity component to negative incident orthogonal velocity component, and a ratio of tangential velocity restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound tangential velocity component to incident tangential velocity component, for the object impacting that zone.

[0076] Restitution matching is provided across the two surface zones.
Specifically, the coefficients of orthogonal velocity restitution for the two zones differ by no more than 15%
for the object separately impacting the zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity. Alternatively or additionally, the ratios of tangential velocity restitution for the two zones differ by no more than 5% for the object separately impacting the zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity at a reference incident angle of 16 to the exposed surface at each location where the object impacts the exposed surface.

[0077] The restitution matching enables the rebound characteristics of the object to be largely independent of whether it contacts the principal or secondary surface zone. This is particularly desirable in sports such as tennis where the object is a tennis ball. The combination of the present CC
capability and the restitution matching can be provided at various parts of the tennis court. For example, the principal and secondary surface zones can respectively be (a) two elongated VC area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines along largely their entire lengths and (a) two fixed-color ("FC") area portions partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the VC area portions along largely their entire lengths. The CC capability is used in determining whether served tennis balls are "in" or "out" while the restitution matching desirably enables the object rebound characteristics to be quite similar for the VC and FC area portions.

[0078] The ID portion here is an ID portion of the principal region. In the invention's thirty-ninth facet, the ID portion responds to the object impacting the principal zone at the OC area by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. Instead of this, the principal region in the invention's fortieth facet externally provides a Cl impact signal if the impact causes the threshold impact criteria to be met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.

[0079] In a forty-first facet of the invention, OT apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface and provides an image-causing tracking impact signal when the object impacts the surface zone according to the tracking. An IG system responds to at least the tracking impact signal by generating a PAV
image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent area of the exposed surface. The IG system typically generates the PAV image in substantially sole response to the impact signal.
Alternatively, the 1G system generates the PAV image in joint response to the impact signal and instruction to generate the PAV image. In either case, a visible record of the print area is generated.

[0080] The boundary of the surface zone and the perimeter of the print area commonly have irregularities that make it difficult to determine how close the print area comes to the surface-zone boundary. These difficulties are overcome with an image-smoothening capability that removes these irregularities in the PAV

image and thereby assists in determining how close the print area comes to the surface-zone boundary. In particular, the image-smoothening capability entails (a) determining a portion of the surface-zone boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.

[0081] The VC region in a forty-second facet of the invention responds to the object impacting the surface zone at the OC area by providing an LI impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria. The LI
impact signal identifies an ID threshold CM area where the impact meets the threshold impact criteria in the surface zone. The threshold CM area is usually smaller than the OC area because the impact meets the threshold impact criteria across only part, usually an internal part, of the OC area.

[0082] Responsive to the LI impact signal, if provided, a CC controller provides a CC initiation signal which designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger than the threshold CM area and at least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms to, and is concentric with the 00 area. The ID
portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color. By operating in this manner, the controller compensates for the threshold CM area being smaller than the OC area so that the print area can closely match the OC area in size, shape, and location.

[0083] A technique is preferably employed for distinguishing between impacts for which color change is desired and impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color change is not desired. In one version of the technique according to a forty-third facet of the invention, the VC
region provides a CI impact signal if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria instead of providing the LI signal if the threshold impact criteria are met. The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the CM area and supplemental impact information.
Responsive to the Cl impact signal, if provided, the CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the CC
initiation signal. The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed color.

[0084] In another version of the impact-distinguishing technique according to a forty-fourth facet of the invention, OT control apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface. The CC controller responds to at least the LI impact signal, if provided, by providing the initiation signal to which the ID portion responds by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color if the tracked movement indicates that the object is expected to impact the 00 area. Alternatively, the CC
controller responds to at least the LI
impact signal, if provided, by providing the initiation signal if the tracking indicates that the object impacted, or is expected to impact, the OC area. The ID portion of the VC region then responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color.
In either case, a body impacting the surface zone but not being so tracked does not cause a color change at the body's impact site on the surface zone.

[0085] As with the first twenty-eight facets of the invention, the CC
capability in the last six facets of the invention enables a viewer to readily visually determine where the object impacted the exposed surface. The accuracy in determining the print-area location is again very high. A tennis player playing on a tennis court provided with the CC capability can, in the vast majority of instances, visually see whether a tennis ball impacting the court near a tennis line is "in" or "out". The need to use challenges for reviewing fine calls and the delay for such review are greatly reduced, The CC capability of the invention's last six facets can be employed in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball, football, and baseball/softball. Although often a ball, the object can be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a person. The CC capability can again be used in activities other than sports. In short, the invention provides a very large advance over the prior art.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0086] Figs. 1 and 2 are layout view of a standard tennis court with examples of areas where tennis balls contact the court's playing surface near the tennis lines indicated in Fig. 2.

[0087] Figs. 3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of simulations of a tennis ball impacting a tennis court as determined by the Hawk-Eye system.

[0088] Figs. 5a - 5c are layout views of an object-impact ("01") structure of an information-presentation ("IP") structure embodiable or/and extendable according to the invention, the 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an impact-dependent ("ID") area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a variable-color ("VC") region. The cross section of each of Figs. 6a, 11 a, 12a, 13a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a, 18a, and 19a described below is taken through plane al-al in Fig. 5a. The cross section of each of Figs.
6b, 11b, 12b, 13b, 14b, 15b, 16b, 17b, 18b, and 19b described below is taken through plane b1-b1 in Fig. 5b.
The cross section of each of Figs. 6c, 11c, 12c, 13c, 14c, 15c, 16c, 17c, 18c, and 19c described below is taken through plane c1-cl in Fig. 5c.

[0089] Figs. 6a - 6c are cross-sectional side views of an embodiment of the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c.

[0090] Figs. 7 - 9 are graphs of spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength.

[0091] Fig. 10 is a graph of a radiosity parameter as a function of time.

[0092] Figs. 11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a - 15c, 16a -16c, 17a - 17c, 18a - 18c, and 19a - 19c are cross-sectional side views of nine respective further embodiments of the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c according to the invention.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934

[0093] Figs. 20a and 20b and 21a and 21b are respective cross-sectional side views of two variations of the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c according to the invention. The cross sections of Figs. 20a and 20b are respectively taken through planes a1-a1 and 131-101 in Figs. 5a and 5b subject to deletion of the fixed-color region in the 01 structure of Figs. 5a and 5b. The same applies to Figs. 21a and 21b.

[0094] Figs. 22a and 22b are additional layout views of the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c for different impact conditions than represented in Figs. 5b and 5c.

[0095] Figs. 23a and 23b are cross-sectional side views of the embodiment of the 01 structures of Figs. 6a - 6c for the impact conditions respectively represented in Figs. 22a and 22b.
The cross sections of Figs. 23a and 23b are respectively taken through planes a2-a2 and b2-b2 in Figs. 22a and 22b.

[0096] Figs. 24a and 24b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of two respective embodiments of the impact-sensitive color-change ("1SCC") structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 11a - 11c or 14a - 14c.

[0097] Figs. 25a and 25b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of two respective embodiments of the ISCC structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 12a - 12c, 15a -15c, 17a - 17c, 19a - 19c, or 21a and 21b.

[0098] Figs. 26a and 26b, 27a and 27b, 28a and 28b, 29a and 29b, 30a and 30b, and 31a and 31b are cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light reflection in VC regions. Figs. 26a and 26b apply to the VC region in Figs. 6a - 6c or 20a and 20b. Figs. 27a and 27b apply to the VC region in Figs.
11a 11c. Figs. 28a and 28b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in Figs. 12a - 12c or 21a and 21b.
Figs. 29a and 29b apply to the VC region in Figs. 13a - 13c. Figs. 30a and 30b apply to the VC region in Figs.
14a - 14c. Figs. 31a and 31b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in Figs. 15a - 15c.

[0099] Figs. 32a and 32b, 33a and 33b, 34a and 34b, 35a and 35b, 36a and 36b, and 37a and 37b are cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light emission in VC regions. Figs. 32a and 32b apply to the VC region in Figs. 6a - 6c or 20a and 20b. Figs. 33a and 33b apply to the VC region in Figs.
11a 11c. Figs. 34a and 34b apply to the VC region in Figs. 12a - 12c or 21a and 21b. Figs. 35a and 35b apply to the VC region in Figs. 13a - 13c. Figs. 36a and 36b apply to the VC region in Figs. 14a - 14c. Figs. 37a and 37b apply to the VC region in Figs. 15a - 15c.
101001 Figs. 38a and 38b are layout views of a cellular embodiment of the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c according to the invention. The cross section of each of Figs. 41a, 42a, 43a, 44a, 45a, 46a, 47a, 48a, 49a, and 50a described below is taken through plane a3-a3 in Fig. 38a. The cross section of each of Figs. 41b, 42b, 43b, 44b, 45b, 46b, 47b, 48b, 49b, and 50b described below is taken through plane b3-b3 in Fig. 38b.
[01011 Figs. 39a and 39b are diagrams of exemplary quantized print areas within circular object-contact areas for the 01 structure of Figs. 38a and 38b.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 [0102] Fig. 40 is a graph of the ratio of the difference in area between a true circle and a quantized circle as a function of the ratio of the radius of the true circle to the length/width dimension of identical squares forming the quantized circle.
10103] Figs. 41a and 41b, 42a and 42b, 43a and 43b, 44a and 44b, 45a and 45b, 46a and 46b, 47a and 47b, 48a and 48b, 49a and 49b, and 50a and 50b are cross-sectional side views of ten respective embodiments of the 01 structure of Figs. 38a and 38b.
10104i Fig. 51 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular ISCC structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 41a and 41b, 44a and 44b, 47a and 47b, or 49a and 49b.
10105] Fig. 52 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular 1SCC structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 42a and 42b or 45a and 45b.
101061 Fig. 53 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the cellular 1SCC structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 43a and 43b or 46a and 46b.
101071 Figs. 54a and 54b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of a duration controller for adjusting color-change ("CC") duration according to the invention.
101081 Figs. 55 - 58 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 54a and 54b according to the invention. The cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs. 55 - 58 is taken through plane b4-b4 in Fig. 54b.
101091 Figs. 59a and 59b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of a duration controller for extending CC duration according to the invention.
10110i Figs. 60 - 63 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 59a and 59b according to the invention. The cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs. 60 - 63 is taken through plane b5-b5 in Fig. 59b.
[01111 Figs. 64a and 64b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
]0112i Figs. 65 - 68 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 64a and 64b according to the invention. The cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs. 65 - 68 is taken through plane b6-b6 in Fig. 64b.

10113] Figs. 69a and 69b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
[0114( Figs. 70 - 73 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional views of four respective embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 69a and 69b according to the invention. The cross section of the layout portion of each of Figs. 70 - 73 is taken through plane b7-b7 in Fig. 69b.
(01151 Figs. 74 - 77 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of four respective IP
structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region and also having an image-generating capability according to the invention, 101161 Figs. 78a and 78b are layout views of an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or both of two adjoining VC
regions according to the invention.
10117] Figs. 79a and 79b are layout views of an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions according to the invention. The cross section of each of Figs. 80a, 81a, 82a, 83a, 84a, and 85a described below is taken through plane a8-a8 in Fig. 79a.
The cross section of each of Figs.
80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b described below is taken through plane b8-b8 in Fig. 79b. Label a8* in each of Figs. 80a, 81a, 82a, 83a, 84a, and 85a indicates the location of a cross section taken through plane a8*-a8* in Fig. 78a. Label b8* in each of Figs. 80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b indicates the location of a cross section taken through plane b8*-b8* in Fig. 78b.
(01181 Figs. 80a and 80b, 81a and 81b, 82a and 82b, 83a and 83b, 84a and 84b, and 85a and 85b are cross-sectional side views of six respective embodiments of the 01 structure of Figs. 79a and 79b.
10119] Figs. 86a and 86b are layout views of an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or both of two adjoining cellular VC regions according to the invention.
101201 Figs. 87a and 87b are layout views of an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining cellular VC regions according to the invention.
10121 Figs. 88 and 89 are composite block diagrams/layout views of two respective IF structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions under control of a CC controller according to the invention.
101221 Figs. 90 - 93 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of four respective IF
structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions and having an image-generating capability according to the invention.
101231 Figs. 94a - 94d are layout views of four respective examples of the object-contact location and resultant print area for the object variously impacting the surface in the 01 structures of Figs. 5a and 5b, 78a and 78b, and 79a and 79b.
101241 Figs. 95a - 95d are screen views of smooth-curve approximations, according to the invention, of the print area and nearby surface area respectively for the examples of Figs. 94a -94d.
101251 Figs. 96 and 97 are layout views of two respective exemplary embodiments of an IF structure implemented into a tennis court according to the invention.
101261 Figs. 98 - 100 are layout views of exemplary embodiments of an IP
structure respectively implemented into a basketball court, a volleyball court, and a football field according to the invention.
101271 Fig. 101 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an IF
structure implemented into a baseball or softball field according to the invention.
101281 Figs. 102a and 102b are cross-sectional views of two models of a hollow ball impacting an inclined surface.
101291 Figs. 103 and 104 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of two respective IF structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
101301 Figs. 105 and 106 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-sectional views of two respective IF structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively adjoining VC regions under control of an intelligent controller according to the invention.
101311 Like reference symbols are employed in the drawings and in the description of the preferred embodiments to represent the same, or very similar, item or items.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
101321 Table of Contents Preliminary Material Basic Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region Timing and Color-difference Parameters Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region Formed with Impact-sensitive Changeably Reflective or Changeably Emissive Material Object-impact Structure Having Separate Impact-sensitive and Color-change Components Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Changeably Reflective or Changeably Emissive Color-change Component Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Color-change Component that Utilizes Electrode Assembly Configuration and General Operation of Electrode Assembly Electrode Layers and their Characteristics and Compositions Reflection-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly Emission-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly Object-impact Structure Having Surface Structure for Protection, Pressure Spreading, and/or Velocity Restitution Matching Object-impact Structure Having Deformation-controlled Extended Color-change Duration Equation-form Summary of Light Relationships Transmissivity Specifications Manufacture of Object-impact Structure Object-impact Structure with Print Area at Least Partly around Unchanged Area Configurations of Impact-sensitive Color-change Structure Pictorial Views of Color Changing by Light Reflection and Emission Object-impact Structure with Cellular Arrangement Adjustment of Changed-state Duration Intelligent Color-change Control Image Generation and Object Tracking Multiple Variable-color Regions Curve Smoothening Color Change Dependent on Location in Variable-color Region of Single Normal Color Sound Generation Accommodation of Color Vision Deficiency Tennis Implementations Other Sports Implementations Velocity Restitution Matching Visible Print-area Record Arising Directly from Object Tracking Intelligent Control for Closely Matching Print Area to Object-contact Area Variations Preliminary Material 101331 The visible light spectrum extends across a wavelength range specified as being as narrow as 400 - 700 nm to as wide as 380 - 780 nm. Light in the visible wavelength range produces a continuous variation in spectral color from violet to red. A visible color is black, any spectral color, and any color creatable from any combination of spectral colors. For instance, visible color includes white, gray, brown, and magenta because each of them is creatable from spectral colors even though none of them is itself in the visible spectrum. Further recitations of color or light herein mean visible color or visible light.
Radiation in the ultraviolet and infrared spectra are respectively hereafter termed ultraviolet ("UV") and infrared ("IR") radiation.
101341 Various wavelength ranges are reported for the main spectral colors.
Although indigo or/and cyan are sometimes identified as main spectral colors, the main spectral colors are here considered to be violet, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red having the wavelength ranges presented in Table 1 and determined as the averages of the ranges reported in ten references rounded off to the nearest 5 nm using the maximum specified range of 380 - 780 nm for the visible spectrum.
Table 1 Color Wavelength Range (nm) Violet 380 - 445 Blue 445 - 490 Green 490 - 570 Yellow 570 - 590 Orange 590 - 630 Red 630 - 780 101351 Recitations of light striking, or incident on, a surface of a body mean that the light strikes, or is incident on, the surface from outside the body. The color of the surface is determined by the wavelengths of light leaving the surface and traveling away from the body. Such light variously consists of incident light reflected by the body so as to leave it along the surface, light emitted by the body so as to leave it along the surface, and light leaving the body along the surface after entering the body along one or more other surfaces and passing through the body. Even if the characteristics that define the color of the surface are fixed, its color can differ if it is struck by light of different wavelength characteristics.
For instance, the surface appears as one color when struck by white light but as another color when struck by non-white light.

[0136j If a person directly views the body, the color of the surface is directly determined by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the surface to the person's eye(s) and the brain's interpretation of those wavelengths. If an image of the surface is captured by a color camera whose captured image is later viewed by a person, the surface's color is initially established by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the surface to the camera. The surface's color as presented in the image is then determined by the wavelengths of the light traveling from the image to the person's eye(s) and the brain's interpretation of those wavelengths. In either case, the wavelengths of light leaving the surface define its color subject, for the camera, to any color distortion introduced by the camera.
101371 The radiosity, sometimes termed intensity, of light of a particular color is the total power per unit area of that light leaving a body along a surface. The spectral radiosity of light of a particular color is the total power per unit area per unit wavelength at each wavelength of light leaving a body along a surface. The spectral radiosity constituency (or spectral radiosity profile) of light of a particular color is the variation (or distribution) of spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength and defines the wavelength constituency of that light. Inasmuch as the spectral radiosity of light is zero outside the visible spectrum, the radiosity of light of a particular color is the integral of the spectral radiosity constituency across the visible spectrum.
101381 Two colors differ when their spectral radiosity constituencies differ. The spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference between light of two different colors is the integral of the absolute value of the difference between the spectral radiosities of the two colors across the visible spectrum. For light passing through a body, the spectral radiosity of light leaving it may differ from that of light entering it due to phenomena such as light absorption in the body. For instance, if light appears as a shade of a color upon entering a body and if the lights radiosity decreases in passing through the body, the light appears as a lighter shade of that color upon leaving the body. When light leaving a body along a surface of the body has multiple reflected components, each reflected component differs from each other reflected component because the light reflected by each reflected component causes its spectral radiosity constituency to differ from the spectral radiosity constituency of each other reflected component.
101391 The normalized spectral radiosity of light of a particular color is its spectral radiosity divided by its radiosity. The normalized spectral radiosity constituency of light of a particular color is the variation of its normalized spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength. The integral of the normalized spectral radiosity constituency across the visible spectrum is one. For light passing through a body, use of the same reference nomenclature to identity the light leaving the body as used to identify the light entering it means that the normalized spectral radiosity constituency remains essentially the same during passage through the body even though the spectral radiosity constituency may change during the passage. This convention is used below for light undergoing plane polarization in passing through a body.

[01401 Rods and cones in the human eye are sensitive to incoming light.
Rods are generally sensitive to the radiosity of the light. Cones are generally sensitive to its spectral radiosity and thus to its wavelength constituency. Cones consist of (a) short-wavelength, or "blue", cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 380 - 520 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 420 - 440 nm, (b) medium-wavelength, or "green", cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 440 -650 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 535 - 555 nm, and (c) long-wavelength, or "red", cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 480 - 780 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 565 - 580 nm. As this data indicates, the sensitivity ranges overlap considerably, especially for green and red cones. Electrical impulses indicative of the stimulation of rods and cones by light are supplied to the brain which interprets the impulses to assign an appropriate color pattern to the light.
101411 Light entering the human eye at a wavelength in the medium-wavelength range commonly stimulates at least two of the three types of cones and often all three types.
An example clarifies this. Light in the yellow range, largely 570 - 590 nm, stimulates red and green cones so that the brain interprets the impulses from the rods and red and green cones as yellow. Assume that the eye receives equal intensities of light in the green range, largely 490 - 570 nm, and the red range, largely 630 - 780 nm, for stimulating red and green cones the same as the light in the yellow range. The brain interprets the electrical impulses from the rods and red and green cones as yellow. Except for the colors at the ends of the visible spectrum, there is normally a continuous regime of suitable combinations for creating any color dependent on wavelength and radiosity.
101421 A recitation that two or more colors materially differ herein means that the colors differ materially as viewed by a person of standard (or average) eyesight/brain-processing capability. The verb "appear", including grammatical variations such as "appearing", as used herein for the chromatic characteristics of light means its apparent color as perceived by the standard human eye/brain. A recitation that a body appears along a surface of the body as a specified color means that the body appears along the surface "largely" as that color. In particular, the spectral radiosity constituency of light of the specified color may so vary across the surface that the specified color is a composite of different colors. The surface portions from where light of wavelengths suitable for the different colors leave the body are usually so microscopically distributed among one another or/and occupy area sufficiently small that the standard human eye/brain interprets that light as essentially a single color.
10143j A "species" of light means light having a particular spectral radiosity constituency. Although a light species produces a color when only light of that species leaves a surface of a body, only some of the below-described light species are described as being of wavelength suitable for forming colors. A recitation that multiple species of the total light leaving a body along a surface area form light of wavelength suitable for a particular color also means that the body appears along the area as that color. A recitation that light leaves a body along an adjoining body means that the light leaves the first body along the interface between the two bodies and vice versa. When all the light leaving a body along an internal interface with another body is of WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2617/657934 wavelength suitable for a selected color, the first body would visually appear as the selected color along the interface if it were an exposed surface.
101441 Each color identified below by notation beginning with a letter, e.g., "A" or "X", means a selected color. Each such selected color may be a single color or a combination of colors appearing as a single color due to suitable mixture of light of wavelengths of those colors. The expression "light of wavelength" means one or more subranges of the wavelength range of the visible spectrum. When a particular color is identified by reference notation, the terminology consisting of that reference notation followed by the word "light" means a species of light of wavelength of that color, i.e., suitable for forming that color. For instance, "V light" means a species of light of wavelength suitable for forming color V. A recitation that two or more colors differ means that light of those colors differs. If the colors are indicated as differing in a particular way, e.g., usually or materially, the light of those colors differ in the same way.
101451 Instances occur in which a body is described as reflecting or emitting light of wavelength of a selected color. Letting that light be termed the "selected color light", the reflection or emission of the selected color light may occur generally along a surface of the body, i.e., directly at the surface or/and at locations internal to the body within short distances of the surface such that the reflected or emitted light does not undergo significant attenuation in traveling those short distances. The body may be sufficiently transmissive of the selected color light that it is alternatively or additionally reflected or emitted inside the body at substantial distances away from the surface and undergoes significant attenuation before exiting the body via the surface.
Light striking a body and not reflected by it is absorbed or/and transmitted by it.
101461 The term "encompasses" means is common to (or includes), usually along a surface. For instance, a first item partly encompasses a second item when part of the area of the second item along a suitable surface is common to the first item. A description of an essentially two-dimensional first item as "outwardly conforming"
to an essentially two-dimensional second item means that the perimeter of the first item, or the outer perimeter of the first item if it is shaped, e.g., as an annulus, to have outer and inner perimeters relative to its center, conforms to the perimeter of the second item, or to the outer perimeter of the second item if it is likewise shaped to have outer and inner perimeters relative to its center.
101471 A "thickness location" of a body means a location extending largely fully through the body's thickness. There are instances in which the transmissivity of a body at one or more thickness locations to light perpendicularly incident on the body at at least wavelength suitable for one or more selected colors is presented as a group of transmissivity specifications. These transmissivity specifications include a usual minimum value for the body's transmissivity to light perpendicularly incident on a surface of the body at wavelength suitable for a selected color where the body normally visually appears along the surface as a principal color and where an impact-dependent print area of the surface changes color in response to an object impacting the surface at an WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 object-contact area generally outwardly conforming to the print area so that it temporarily appears as changed color materially different from the principal color.
101481 The body may have thickness locations where the transmissivity of the perpendicularly incident light is less than the usual minimum. If so, the corresponding locations along the surface still normally appear as the principal color due to phenomena such as light scattering and non-perpendicular light reflection and by arranging for such thickness locations to be sufficiently laterally small that their actual colors are not significantly perceivable by the standard human eye/brain. Any such corresponding locations along the print area similarly temporarily appear as the changed color, The body meets the requisite color appearances along the surface, including the print area, even though the body's transmissivity to the incident light is less than the usual minimum at one or more thickness locations.
101491 Material is transparent if the shape of a body separated from the material only by air or vacuum can be clearly and accurately seen through the material. The material is transparent even if the body's shape is magnified or shrunk as seen through the material. Transparent material is clear transparent if the color(s) of the body as seen through the material are the same as the body's actual color(s).
Transparent material is tinted transparent if the color(s) of the body as seen through the material differ from the body's actual color(s) due to tinting light reflection by the material.
101501 Various instances are described below in which light incident on the first region of a body containing first and second regions is partly reflected and partly transmitted by the first region so as to be incident on the second region which at least partly reflects the transmitted light. The light reflected by the first region is of wavelength suitable for a first color. The light reflected by the second region is of wavelength suitable for a second color. Even if not explicitly stated, the two colors necessarily differ because light reflection by the first region causes the spectral radiosity constituency of the second color to lack at least part of the spectral radiosity constituency of the first color and thus to differ from the spectral radiosity constituency of the first color. If the two regions have identical reflection characteristics, the second color is black because the first region reflects the light needed for the second color to be non-black.
101511 The term 'impact-dependent' as used in describing a three-dimensional region or a surface area means that the lateral extent of the region or area depends on the lateral extent of the location where an object impacts the region or area. Impact-dependent segments of auxiliary layers, electrode assemblies, electrode structures, and core layers are often respectively described below as auxiliary segments, assembly segments, electrode segments, and core segments.
101521 An "arbitrary" shape means any shape and includes shapes not significantly restricted to a largely fixed characteristic, such as a largely fixed dimension, along the shape. An arbitrary shape is not limited to one or more predefined shapes such as polygons, regular closed curves, and finite-width lines, straight or curved.
Recitations of an action occurring "along" a body or along a surface of a body mean that the action occurs within WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 a short distance of the surface, often inside the body, and not necessarily at the surface. The expressions "situated fully along", "lying fully along", "extending fully along", and grammatical variations mean adjoining along substantially the entire length (of).
101531 The words "overlying" and "underlying" used below in describing structures apply to the orientations of those structures as shown in the drawings. The same applies to "over", "above, "under", and "below" as used in a directional sense in describing such structures. These six words are to be interpreted to mean corresponding other directional-sense words for structures configured identical to, but oriented differently than, those shown in the drawings.
101541 A majority component of a multi-component item is a component constituting more than 50% of the item according to a suitable measurement. An N% majority component of a multi-component item is a component constituting at least N% of the item where N is a number greater than 50. Each provision that light of a first species is a (or the) majority component of light of a second species means that the light of the first species is radiositywise, i.e., in terms of radiosity, a (or the) majority component of light of the second species.
A majority component of a color means radiositywise a majority component of light forming that color. The percentage difference between two values of a parameter means the quotient, converted to percent, of their difference and average.
101551 The term "normally" refers to actions occurring during the normal state, explained below, in the object-impact structures of the invention, e.g., the expression "normally appears" means visually appears during the normal state. Other time-related terms, such as "usually" and "typically", are used to describe actions occurring during the normal state but not limited to occurring during the normal state. The term "temporarily"
refers to actions occurring during the changed state, defined below, in the object-impact structures, e.g., the expression "temporarily appears" means visually appears during the changed state. Force acting on a body normal, i.e., perpendicular, to a surface where it is contacted by the body, is termed "orthogonal" force herein to avoid confusion with the meaning of "normal" otherwise used herein.
101561 The term "or/and" or "and/or" between a pair of items means either or both items. Similarly, "or/and" or "and/or" before the next-to-last item of three or more items means any one or more, up to all, of the items. Use of multiple groups of items in a sentence where each group of items has an "or" before the last item in that group means, except as the context otherwise indicates, that the first items in the groups are associated with each other, that the second items in the groups are associated with each other, and so on. For instance, a recitation of the form "Item J1, J2, or J3 is connected to item K1, K2, or K3"
means that item J1 is connected to item Kl, item J2 is connected to item K2, and item J3 is connected to item K3.
The plural term "criteria" is generally used below to describe the various types of standards used in the invention because each type of standards is generally capable of consisting of multiple standards.

101571 All recitations of the same, uniform, identical, a single, singly, full, only, constant, fixed, all, the entire, straight, flat, planar, parallel, perpendicular, conform, continuous, adjacent, adjoin, opposite, symmetrical, mirror image, simultaneous, independent, transparent, block, absorb, non-emissive, passive, prevent, absent, and grammatical variations ending in "Iy" respectively mean largely the same, largely uniform, largely identical, largely a single, largely singly, largely fully, largely only, largely constant, largely fixed, largely all, largely the entire, largely straight, largely flat, largely planar, largely parallel, largely perpendicular, largely conform, largely continuous, largely adjacent, largely adjoin, largely opposite, largely symmetrical, largely mirror image, largely simultaneous, largely independent, largely transparent, largely block, largely absorb, largely non-emissive, largely passive, largely prevent, largely absent, and "largely" followed by the variations ending in "Iy" except as otherwise indicated. A recitation that multiple light species form a further light species includes the meaning that the multiple species largely form the further light species. Each recitation providing that later textual material is the same as earlier textual material means that the earlier material is incorporated by reference into the later material.
101581 Each signal described below as being transmitted via a communication path, e.g., in a network of communication paths, is transmitted wirelessly or via one or more electrical wires of that communication path. A
recitation that a body undergoes a change in response to a signal means that that the change occurs due to a change in a variable, e.g., current and voltage, in which the signal exists.
Light provided from a particular source or in a particular way such as emission or reflection may be viewed as a light beam. Light provided from multiple sources or in multiple ways may be viewed as multiple light beams.
10159I The terms "conductive", "resistive", and "insulating" respectively mean electrically conductive, electrically resistive, and electrically insulating except as otherwise indicated. A material having a resistivity less than 10 ohm-cm at 300 K (approximately usual room temperature) is deemed to be conductive. A material having a resistivity greater than 1010 ohm-cm at 300 K is deemed to be insulating (or dielectric). A material having a resistivity from 10 ohm-cm to 10Th ohm-cm at 300 K is deemed to be resistive. Resistive materials conduct current with the conduction capability progressively increasing as the resistivity decreases from 1010 ohm-cm to 10 ohm-cm at 300 K. Inasmuch as conductivity is the inverse of resistivity, conductivity-based criteria are numerically the inverse of resistivity-based criteria.
101601 The order in which the elements of an inorganic chemical compound appear below in the compound's chemical name or/and chemical formula generally follows the standards of the International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry ('IUPAC'). That is, a more electronegative element follows a less electronegative element in the name and formula of an inorganic compound. In some situations, use of the IUPAC element-ordering convention for inorganic compounds results in element orderings different from that generally or sometimes used. Such situations are accommodated herein by presenting other orderings of the chemical formulas in brackets following the IUPAC chemical formulas.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 101611 The following acronyms are used as adjectives below to shorten the description. "AB" means assembly. "ALA" means attack-line-adjoining. "ALV" means attack-line-vicinity.
"BC" means backcourt. "BLA"
means baseline-adjoining. "BP" means beyond-path. "By" means boundary-vicinity. "CC" means color-change. "CE" means changeably emissive. "Cl" means characteristics-identifying. "C LA' means centerline-adjoining. "CM" means criteria-meeting. "COM" means communication. "CR" means changeably reflective.
"DE" means duration-extension. "DF" means deformation. "DP" means distributed-pressure. "ELA" means endline-adjoining or end-line-adjoining. "EM" means electromagnetic. "FA"
means far auxiliary. "FC" means fixed-color. "FE" means far electrode. "FLT" means foul-territory. "FLV" means foul-line-vicinity. "FRT" means fair-territory. "GAB" means general assembly. "GFA" means general far auxiliary. "HA" means half-alley. "IB"
means inbounds. "ID" means "impact-dependent". "IDVC" means impact-dependent variable-color. "IF" means interface. "IG" means image-generating. "P" means information-presentation.
"IS" means impact-sensitive.
"ISCC" means impact-sensitive color-change. "LA" means line-adjoining. "LC"
means liquid-crystal. "LE"
means light-emissive. "LI" means location-identifying. "NA" means near auxiliary. "NE" means near electrode.
"OB" means out-of-bounds. "QC" means object-contact. "01" means object-impact.
"OS" means object-separation. "OT" means object-tracking. "PA" means print-area. "PAY" means print-area vicinity. "PS" means pressure-spreading. "PSCC" means pressure-sensitive color-change. "PZ" means polarization. "RA" means reflection-adjusting. "QC" means quartercourt "SC" means servicecourt. "SF"
means surface. "SLA" means sideline-adjoining or side-line-adjoining. "SS" means surface-structure.
"SVLA" means serviceline-adjoining.
"TH" means threshold. "VA" means voltage-application. "VC" means variable-color. "WI" means wavelength-independent. "XN" means transition. "3P" means three-point. "3PL" means three-point-line. "3PLV" means three-point-line-vicinity.
Basic Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region 101621 Figs. 5a - Sc (collectively "Fig. 5") illustrate the layout of a basic object-impact structure 100 which undergoes reversible color changes along an externally exposed surface 102 according to the invention when exposed surface 102 is impacted by an object 104 during an activity such as a sport. "01" hereafter means object-impact. "Impact" hereafter means impact of object 104 on surface 102.
Fig. 5a presents the general layout of 01 structure 100. Figs. 5b and Sc depict exemplary color changes that occur along surface 102 due to the impact. Object 104 leaves surface 102 subsequent to impact and is indicated in dashed line in Figs. 5b and 5c at locations shortly after impact. Although object 104 is often directed toward particular locations on surface 102, object 104 can generally impact anywhere on surface 102.
101631 Object 104 is typically airborne and separated from other solid matter prior to impact. For a sports activity, object 104 is typically a sports instrument such as a spherical ball, e.g., a tennis ball, basketball, or volleyball when the activity is tennis, basketball, or volleyball. Object 104 can, however, be part of a larger body WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 that may not be airborne prior to impact. For instance, object 104 can be a shoe on a foot of a person such as a tennis, basketball, or volleyball player. Different embodiments of 01 structure 100 can be employed, usually in different parts of surface 102, so that the embodiments of object 104 differ from 01 embodiment to 01 embodiment [01641 01 structure 100, which serves as or in an information-presentation structure, is used in determining whether object 104 impacts a specified zone of surface 102. In this regard, structure 100 contains a principal variable-color region 106 and a secondary fixed-color region 108 which meet at a region-region interface 110.
"VC" and "FC" hereafter respectively mean variable-color and fixed-color.
Although interface 110 appears straight in Fig. 5, VC region 106 and FC region 108 can be variously geometrically configured along interface 110, e.g., curved, or flat and curved. They can meet at corners. FC region 108 can extend partly or fully laterally around VC region 106 and vice versa. For instance, region 108 can adjoin region 106 along two or more sides of region 106 if it is shaped laterally like a polygon and vice versa.
101651 VC region 106 extends to surface 102 at a principal VC surface zone 112 and normally appears along it as a principal surface color A during the activity. See Fig. 5a. "SF"
hereafter means surface. This occurs because only A light normally leaves region 106 along SF zone 112.
Region 106 is then in a state termed the "normal state". Recitations hereafter of (a) region 106 normally appearing as principal SF color A
mean that region 106 normally appears along zone 112 as color A, (b) A light leaving region 106 mean that A
light leaves it via zone 112, and (c) colors and color changes respectively mean colors present, and color changes occurring, during the activity. Region 106 contains principal impact-sensitive color-change structure along or below all of zone 112. "1SCC" hereafter means impact-sensitive color-change. Examples of the ISCC
structure, not separately indicated in Fig. 5, are described below and shown in later drawings. Region 106 may contain other structure described below.
101661 FC region 108, which extends to surface 102 at a secondary FC SF
zone 114, fixedly appears along FC SF zone 114 as a secondary SF color A. Secondary SF color A' is often the same as, but can differ significantly from, principal color A. Region 108 can consist of multiple secondary FC subregions extending to zone 114 so that consecutive ones appear along zone 114 as different secondary colors A'. Except as indicated below, region 108 is hereafter treated as appearing along zone 114 as only one color A'. SF zones 112 and 114 meet at an SF edge of interface 110.
101671 An impact-dependent portion of VC region 106 responds to object 104 impacting SF zone 112 at a principal impact-dependent object-contact area 116 (laterally) spanning where object 104 contacts (or contacted) zone 112 by temporarily appearing along a corresponding principal impact-dependent print area 118 of zone 112 as a generic changed SF color X (a) in some general 01 embodiments if the impact meets (or satisfies) principal basic threshold impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments if region 106, specifically the impact-dependent portion, is provided with a principal general color-change control signal generated in response to the impact meeting the principal basic threshold impact criteria sometimes (conditionally) dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments. See Figs. 5b and 5c. "ID", "OC", "TH", and "CC" hereafter respectively mean impact-dependent, object-contact, threshold, and color-change. The ID portion of region 106 is hereafter termed the principal IDVC portion where "IDVC' hereafter means impact-dependent variable-color. Instances in which the principal IDVC portion, often simply the IDVC portion, changes to appear as generic changed SF color X along ID
print area 118 in response to the principal general CC control signal are described below, particularly beginning with the structure of Figs. 64a and 64b.
101681 ID OC area 116 is capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape.
Print area 118 constitutes part of zone 112, all of which is capable of temporarily appearing as generic changed SF color X. Print area 118 closely matches OC area 116 in size, shape, and location. In particular, print area 118 at least partly encompasses OC area 116, at least mostly, usually fully, outwardly conforms to it, and is largely concentric with it. The principal basic TH impact criteria can vary with where print area 118 occurs in zone 112.
101691 When VC region 106 includes structure besides the ISCC structure, an ID segment of the ISCC
structure specifically responds to object 104 impacting OC area 116 by causing the IDVC portion to temporarily appear along print area 118 as changed color X (a) in some general 01 embodiments if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments if the ID ISCC
segment is provided with the general CC control signal generated in response to the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria again sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments. In any event, the appearance of the IDVC portion along area 118 as changed SF color X occurs because only X light temporarily leaves the IDVC portion along area 118. Color X differs materially from color A and usually from color A'.
Hence, X light differs materially from A light. Recitations hereafter of (a) the IDVC portion temporarily appearing as color X mean that the IDVC portion temporarily appears along area 118 as color X and (b) X light leaving the IDVC portion mean that X light leaves it via area 118.
101701 Importantly, the impact usually leads to color change along surface 102 only at print area 118 closely matching OC area 116 in size, shape, and location. Although other impacts of object 104 may cause color change at other locations along surface 102, a particular impact of object 104 usually does not lead to, and is usually incapable of leading to, color change at any location along surface 102 other than print area 118 for that impact. Persons viewing surface 102 therefore need essentially not be concerned about a false color change along surface 102, i.e., a color change not accurately representing area 116.
101711 The spectral radiosity constituency of A light may vary across SF
zone 112. That is, principal color A may be a composite of different colors such as primary colors red, green, and blue. The parts of zone 112 from where light of wavelengths for the different colors leaves zone 112 are usually so microscopically distributed among one another that the standard human eye/brain interprets that light as essentially a single color.
1 721 The spectral radiosity constituency of X light may similarly vary across print area 118 so that changed color X is also a composite of different colors. One color in such a color X composite may be color A
or, if it is a composite of different colors, one or more colors in the color X composite may be the same as one or more colors in the color A composite. If so, the parts of area 118 from where light of wavelengths for the different colors in the color X composite leaves area 118 are so microscopically distributed among one another that, across area 118, the standard human eye/brain does not separately distinguish color A or any color identical to a color in the color A composite. Color X, specifically the color X composite, still differs materially from color A despite the color X composite containing color A or a color identical to a color in the color A
composite.
101 731 The principal basic TH impact criteria consist of one or more TH
impact characteristics which the impact must meet for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X. There are two primary locations for assessing the impacts effects to determine whether the TH impact criteria are met: (i) directly at SF zone 112 and (ii) along a plane, termed the internal plane, extending laterally through VC region 106 generally parallel to, and spaced apart from, zone 112. In either case, the impact is typically characterized by an impact parameter P
that varies between a perimeter (first) value P,õ and an interior (second) value P. For zone 112, perimeter value Pp, exists along the perimeter of OC area 116 while interior value P,r, exists at one or more points inside area 116. For the internal plane, perimeter value Pp, exists along the perimeter of a projection of area 116 onto the internal plane while interior value Põ, exists at one or more points inside that projection. Area 116 and the projection can differ in size as long as a line extending perpendicular to area 116 through its center also extends perpendicular to the projection through its center. The difference between values Pp: and Pin is the absolute value of the maximum difference between any two values of impact parameter P across area 116 or the projection.
101741 For the situation in which the IDVC portion temporarily appears as changed color X if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria and thus momentarily putting aside the situation dealt with further below in which the IDVC portion temporarily appears as color X if the ID ISCC segment is provided with the general CC
control signal generated in response to both the TH impact criteria and other impact criteria being met, the TH
impact criteria are met at each point, termed a criteria-meeting point, inside OC area 116 or the projection of area 116 where the absolute value AP of the difference between impact parameter P and perimeter value Pp, equals or exceeds a local TH value API,' of parameter difference P. "CM"
hereafter means criteria-meeting.
Local TH parameter difference value P1 lies between zero and maximum parameter difference For each CM point, a corresponding point along SF zone 112 temporarily appears along zone 112 as color X.
These changed-color points form print area 118.

101751 If the impacts effects are assessed along SF zone 112, each changed-color point along zone 112 is usually the same as the corresponding CM point. Print area 118 is smaller than OC area 116 because a band 120 not containing any CM point lies between the perimeters of areas 116 and 118. Perimeter band 120 appears as color A as indicated in Figs. 5b and 5c. If the impact's effects are assessed along the internal plane, each changed-color point along zone 112 is usually located opposite, or nearly opposite, the corresponding CM
point. Print area 118 can be smaller or larger than OC area 116 depending on the size of area 116 relative to that of the projection. Print area 118 is usually smaller than OC area 116 when the projection is of the same size as, or smaller than, area .116. Depending on how well print area 118 outwardly conforms to 00 area 1.16, area 118 can be partly inside and partly outside area 116 in the projection case.
10176j Local TH parameter difference value APthl is preferably the same at every point subject to the TH
impact criteria. If so, local difference value APthi is replaced with a fixed global TH value APti,c, of parameter difference AP. Local TH value AP1h1 can, however, differ from point to point subject to the TH impact criteria. In that case, the APti-d values for the points subject to the TH impact criteria form a local TH parameter difference function dependent on the location of each point subject to the TH impact criteria.
101771 Impact parameter P can be implemented in various ways. In one implementation, parameter P is pressure resulting from object 104 impacting SF zone 112, specifically OC area 116. In the following material, normal pressure at any point in VC region 106 means pressure existent at that point when it is not significantly subjected to any effect of the impact. Normal SF pressure along zone 112 means normal external pressure, usually atmospheric pressure nominally 1 atm, along zone 112. Normal internal pressure at any point inside region 106 means internal pressure existent at that point when it is not significantly subjected to any effect of the impact. Excess pressure at any point of region 106 means pressure in excess of normal pressure at that point.
Excess SF pressure along zone 112 then means pressure in excess of normal SF
pressure along zone 112.
Excess internal pressure at any point inside region 106 means internal pressure in excess of normal internal pressure at that point.
101781 Object 104 exerts force on 00 area 116 during the impact. This force is expressible as excess SF
pressure across area 116. The excess SF pressure reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside area 116 and drops largely to zero along its perimeter. With the excess SF
pressure across SF zone 112 embodying impact parameter difference AP, the TH impact criteria become principal basic excess SF pressure criteria requiring that the excess pressure at a point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for it to be a TH CM point and temporarily appear as color X.
Each local TH excess SF pressure value, which can embody local TH parameter difference value APtr,i depending on the internal configuration of 01 structure 100, lies between zero and the maximum excess SF pressure value.
[01791 Reducing the TH values of excess SF pressure causes the size of A-colored perimeter band 120 to be reduced and print area 118 to more closely match 00 area 116. However, this also causes SF zone 112 to be susceptible to undesired color changes due to bodies other than object 104 impacting zone 112 with less force than object 104 usually impacts zone 112. The TH excess SF pressure values are chosen to be sufficiently ow as to make band 120 quite small while limiting the likelihood of such undesired color changes as much as reasonably feasible.
101801 The excess SF pressure causes excess internal pressure to be produced inside VC region 106.
The excess internal pressure is localized mostly to material along 00 area 116. Similar to the excess SF
pressure, the excess internal pressure along the projection of area 116 onto the internal plane reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside the projection and drops largely to zero along its perimeter. The excess internal pressure along the internal plane can embody impact parameter difference P. The TH impact criteria along the internal plane become principal basic excess internal pressure criteria requiring that the excess internal pressure at a point along the internal plane equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to temporarily appear as color X.
Each local TH excess internal pressure value, which can embody local TH parameter difference value APthi, lies between zero and the maximum excess internal pressure value.
101811 The impact usually causes VC region 106 to significantly deform along OC area 116. If so, impact parameter P can be a measure of the deformation. For this purpose, item 122 in Fig, 5b or 5c indicates the ID
area where the impact causes SF zone 112 to deform. Area 122, termed the principal SF deformation area, outwardly conforms to 00 area 116 and encompasses at least part of, usually most of, area 116. "DF" hereafter means deformation. Although ID SF DF area .122 is sometimes slightly smaller than OC area 116, area 116 is also labeled as area 122 in Figs. 5b and 5c and in later drawings to simplify the representation. Item 124 in Fig.
5b or 5c indicates the total ID area where object 104 contacts surface 102 and, as shown in Fig. 5c, can extend into FC SF zone 114.
101821 The deformation reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside SF DF area 122 and drops largely to zero along its perimeter. With the deformation along SF zone 112 embodying impact parameter difference AP, the TH impact criteria become principal basic SF DF criteria requiring that the deformation at a point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order for it to temporarily appear as color X. Each local TH SF DF value lies between zero and the maximum SF DF value.
Inasmuch as reducing the TH
SF DF values for causing print area 118 to more closely match OC area 116 also causes zone 112 to be susceptible to undesired color changes due to bodies other than object 104 impacting zone 112 with less force than object 104 usually impacts zone 112, the TH SF DF values are chosen to be sufficiently low as to achieve good matching between areas 116 and 118 while limiting the likelihood of such undesired color changes as much as reasonably feasible, [0183] The deformation along SF zone 112 may go into a vibrating mode in which the IDVC portion contacts and expands at an amplitude that rapidly dies out. Such vibrational deformation may sometimes be needed for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X. If vibrational deformation occurs, the associated range of frequencies arising from the impact can be incorporated into the principal SF DF criteria to further reduce the likelihood of undesired color changes.
10184I Local TH value APthi of impact parameter difference AP has been described above as essentially a fixed value so that the color along the perimeter of print area 118 changes abruptly from color A to color X in moving from outside aea 118 to inside it. However, the temporary color change along the perimeter of area 118 often occurs in a narrow transition band (not shown) which extends along the perimeter of area 118 and in which the color progressively changes from color A to color X in crossing from outside the perimeter transition band to inside it. This arises because the transition from color A to color X largely starts to occur as parameter difference AP passes a low local TH value APthil for each point subject to the TH impact criteria and largely completes the color change as difference AP passes, for that point, a high local TH value APthih greater than low value ANA. Local TH value APth: for each point subject to the TH impact criteria is typically that point's high TH
value Om but can be a value between, e.g., halfway between, that point's TH
values EXP!hil and APthih. For implementations of difference AP with excess pressure or deformation, the transition from color A to color X
largely starts to occur as excess pressure or deformation passes a low local TH excess pressure or DF value for each point subject to the TH impact criteria and largely completes the color change as excess pressure or deformation passes a high local TH excess pressure or DF value for that point.
101851 01 structure 100 is usually arranged and operated so that generic changed color X is capable of being only a single (actual) color. However, the principal basic TH impact criteria can consist of multiple sets of fully different, i.e., nonoverlapping, principal basic TH impact criteria respectively corresponding to multiple specific (or specified) changed colors materially different from principal color A. More than one, typically all, of the specific changed colors differ, usually materially. The impact on OC area 116 of SF zone 112 is potentially capable of meeting (or satisfying) any of the principal basic TH impact criteria sets. If the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria, generic changed color X is the specific changed color for the basic TH impact criteria set actually met by the impact sometimes dependent on other criteria also being met. The basic TH impact criteria sets usually form a continuous chain in which consecutive criteria sets meet each other without overlapping.
101861 The basic TH impact criteria sets can sometimes be mathematically described as follows in terms of impact parameter difference P. Letting n be an integer greater than 1, n principal basic TH impact criteria sets Si, S2, ... S, are respectively associated with n specific changed colors Xl, X2, Xr: materially different from principal color A and with n progressively increasing local TH parameter difference values AP2, = =
. APthi,r, lying between zero and maximum parameter difference AP,,,,,. Each local TH parameter difference value APthi,,, except lowest-numbered value APtho, thereby exceeds next-lowest-numbered value LIPthl,j-1 where integer i varies from 1 to n.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 101871 Each basic TH impact criteria set Si, except highest-numbered criteria set Sn, is defined by the requirement that parameter difference AP equal or exceed local TH parameter difference value APtha but be no greater than an infinitesimal amount below a higher local parameter difference value APN,,i less than or equal to next higher local TH parameter difference value APtho.i. Each criteria set Si, except set Srõ is a AP range R
extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value APihu and a high limit an infinitesimal amount below high difference value APthh,i. Highest-numbered criteria set S., is defined by the requirement that difference AP
equal or exceed local TH parameter difference value APIN.,-; but not exceed a higher local parameter difference value APti,,,õ less than or equal to maximum parameter difference Hence, highest-numbered set Sr, is a AP range Rõ extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value APIa., and a high limit equal to high difference value APt,h,õ.
101881 High-limit difference value APtõ,., for each range Ri, except highest range Rn, usually equals low-limit difference value APth+1 for next higher range R,,t, and high-limit difference value APtwi, for highest range R0 usually equals maximum difference In that case, criteria sets Si - S, substantially fully cover a total AP range extending continuously from lowest difference value AP
th1,1 to maximum difference APm3x. Impact parameter difference AP c potentially capable of meeting any of criteria sets Si - S. If the impact meets the TH
impact criteria so that difference AP meets the TH impact criteria, changed color X is specific changed color Xi for criteria set Si actually met by difference AP. Should each local TH
difference value API,Li be the same at every point subject to the TH impact criteria, each local TH difference value APthi,, is replaced with a fixed global TH value APtrai of difference AP.
101891 The TH impact criteria sets can, for example, consist of fully different ranges of excess SF pressure across OC area 116 or excess internal pressure along the projection of area 116 onto the internal plane. Each range of excess SF or internal pressure is associated with a different one of the specific changed colors.
Changed color X is then specific changed color Xi for the range of excess SF
or internal pressure met by the impact. The low limit of each pressure range is the minimum value of excess SF
or internal pressure for causing color X to be specific changed color Xi for that pressure range. The high limit of each pressure range, except the highest pressure range, is preferably an infinitesimal amount below the low limit of the next highest range so that the TH impact criteria sets occupy a continuous total pressure range beginning at the low limit of the lowest range. All the specific changed colors X, - Xi, preferably differ materially from one another.
10190) Use of TH impact criteria sets provides a capability to distinguish between certain different types of impacts. For instance, if the maximum excess SF pressure usually exerted by one embodiment of object 104 exceeds the minimum excess SF pressure usually exerted by another embodiment of object 104, appropriate choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables 01 structure 100 to distinguish between impacts of the two object embodiments. In tennis, suitable choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables structure 100 to distinguish between impacts of a tennis ball and impacts of other bodies which usually impact SF zone 112 harder or softer than a tennis ball. Color X is generally dealt with below as a single color even though it can be provided as one of multiple changed colors dependent on the TH impact criteria sets.
19 11 The change, or switch, from color A to color X along print area 118 places VC region 106 in a state, termed the "changed" state, in which X light temporarily leaves the IDVC
portion along area 118. In the changed state, region 106 continues to appear as color A along the remainder of SF
zone 112 except possibly at any location where another temporary change to color X occurs during the current temporary color change due to object 104 also impacting zone 112 so as to meet the TH impact criteria. The 1DVC portion later returns to appearing as color A. If another change to color X occurs during the current temporary color change at any location along zone 112 due to another impact, any other such location along zone 112 likewise later returns to appearing as color A. Region 106 later returns to appearing as color A along all of zone 112 so as to return, or switch back, to the normal state. The impacts can be by the same or different embodiments of object 104.
101921 An occurrence of the changed state herein means only the temporary color change due to the impact causing that changed-state occurrence. If, during a changed-state occurrence, object 104 of the same or a different embodiment again impacts SF zone 112 sufficient to meet the TH
impact criteria, any temporary color change which that further impact causes along zone 112 during the current changed-state occurrence constitutes another changed-state occurrence. Multiple changed-state occurrences can thus overlap in time.
Print area 118 of one of multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences can also overlap with area 118 of at least one other one of those changed-state occurrences. The situation of multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences is not expressly mentioned further below in order to shorten this description. However, any recitation below specifying that a VC region, such as VC region 106, returns to the normal state after the changed state means that, if there are multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences, the VC region returns to the normal state after the last of those occurrences without (fully) returning to the normal state directly after any earlier one of those occurrences.
[01931 VC region 106 is in the changed state for a CC duration (or time period) Litd, generally defined as the interval from the time at which print area 118 first fully appears as changed color X to the time at which area 118 starts returning to color A, i.e., the interval during which area 118 temporarily appears as color X. CC
duration a, is usually at least 2 s in order to allow persons using 01 structure 100 sufficient time to clearly determine that area 118 exists and where it exists along SF zone 112. Duration Atdr is often at least 4 s, sometimes at least 6 s, and is usually no more than 60 s but can be 120 s or more.
101941 In particular, the Atdr length depends considerably on the type of activity for which 01 structure 100 is being used. If the activity is a ball-based sport such as tennis, basketball, volleyball, or baseball/softball. CC
duration Atdr is desirably long enough for players and observers, including any sports official(s), to clearly determine the location of print area 118 on SF zone 112 but not so long as to significantly interrupt play. The iltd, length for such a sport is usually at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 s, can be at least 15, 20, or 30s, and is usually no more than 60 s but can be longer, e.g., up to 90 or 120 s or more, or shorter, e.g.. no more than 30, 20, 15, 10, 8, or 6 s. For such a ball-based sport in which the ball embodying object 104 bounces off surface 102, duration Atdr is usually much longer than the time duration (or contact time) tito,, almost always less than 25 ms, during which the ball contacts zone 112 during the impact.
101951 CC duration Atdr may be at an automatic (or natural) value Atdraõ
that includes a base portion albs passively determined by the (physical/chemical) properties of the material(s) in the ISCC structure. Base duration Atjrbs is fixed (constant) for a given set of environmental conditions, including a given external temperature and a given external pressure, nominally 1 atm, at identical impact conditions. VC region 106 may contain componentry, described below, which automatically extends duration Atdr by an amount Atdrext beyond base duration Atdrbs. Automatic duration value Atd,,, consists of base duration Atd,t, and potentially extension duration At ¨text. Automatic value is usually at least 2 s, often at least 4 s, sometimes at least 6 s, and usually no more than 60 s, often no more than 30s, sometimes no more than 15 s. Absent externally caused adjustment, the changed state automatically terminates at the end of value Atdrõ.
101961 Automatic duration value Atdr,õ is usually in a principal pre-established CC time duration range, i.e., an impact-to-impact Atd, range established prior to impact. The length of the pre-established CC duration range, i.e., the time period between its tow and high ends from impact to impact is relatively small, usually no more than 2 s, preferably no more than 1 s, more preferably no more than 0.5 s, so that the impact-to-impact variation in automatic value Atd,õ is quite small.
101971 The appearance of VC region 106 as color A during the normal state occurs while 01 structure 100 is in operation. The production of color A during structure operation often occurs passively, i.e., only by light reflection. Region 106 thus appears as color A when structure 100 is inactive.
However, color A can be produced actively, e.g., by an action involving light emission from region 106. If so, the light emission is usually terminated to save power when structure 100 is inactive. In that case, region 106 appears as another color, termed passive color P, along SF zone 112 while structure 100 is inactive.
Passive color P, which can be the same as secondary color A', necessarily differs from color A and usually from color X.
101981 Fig. 5b presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 fully within SF zone 112.
Total ID OC area 124 here is the same as OC area 116. Print area 118 encompasses most of, and fully conforms to, OC area 116 so that areas 116 and 118 are largely concentric.
Hence, print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116. Fig. 22a below presents an example, similar to that of Fig. 5b, in which print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 and does not fully inwardly conform to area 116.
101991 Fig. Sc presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102 within both of SF zones 112 and 114 in the same impact. Total OC area 124 here consists of OC area 116 and an adjoining secondary ID
OC area 126 of zone 114. The impact on secondary ID OC area 126 does not cause it to change color significantly. Hence, area 126 largely remains secondary color A. Print area 118 at least partly encompasses 00 area 116 and may, or may not, encompass most of it depending on the sizes of OC areas 116 and 126 and perimeter band 120 relative to one another, Print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 so as to be largely concentric with it Fig. 22b below presents an example, similar to that of Fig. 5c, in which print area 118 outwardly conforms mostly, but not fully, to OC area 116 and does not inwardly conform mostly to it.
102001 The impact on both of OC areas 116 and 126 is sometimes insufficient to meet the principal TH
impact criteria for principal area 116 even though the TH impact criteria would be met if total OC area 124 were in SF zone 112. If so, area 116 may continue to appear as color A.
Alternatively, FO region 108 contains impact-sensitive material extending along interface 110 to a distance approximately equal to the maximum lateral dimension of print area 118 during impacts. Although secondary OC area 126 remains color A' after the impact, the combination of the impact-sensitive material in region 108 and the 1SCC material in VC region 106 causes print area 118 to temporarily appear as color X if the impact meets composite basic TH impact criteria usually numerically the same as the principal basic TH impact criteria.
10201j Figs. 6a - 6c, 11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a -15c, 16a - 16c, 17a - 17c, 18a -18c, and 19a - 19c present side cross sections of ten embodiments of 01 structure

100 where each triad of Figs. ja -jc for integer j being 6 and then varying from 11 to 19 depicts a different embodiment The basic side cross sections, and thus how the embodiments appear in the normal state, are respectively shown in Figs. 6a, 11a, 12a, 13a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a, 18a, and 19a corresponding to Fig. 5a. Figs. 6b, lib, 12b, 13b, 141), 15b, 16b, 17b, 18b, and 19b corresponding to Fig. 5b present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object 104 impacts fully within SF zone 112. Figs. 6c, 11c, 12c, 13c, 14c, 15c, 16c, 17c, 18c, and 19c present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object 104 simultaneously impacts both of SF zones 112 and 114.
10202) Referring to Figs. Ga - 6c (collectively "Fig. 6"), they illustrate a general embodiment 130 of 01 structure 100 for which duration Att of the changed state is automatic value Atdraõ absent externally caused adjustment. VC region 106 here consists only of the 1500 structure indicated here and later as item 132. In Fig. 6, surface 102 is flat and extends parallel to a plane generally tangent to Earth's surface. However, surface 102 can be significantly curved. Even when surface 102 is flat, it can extend at a significant angle to a plane generally tangent to Earth's surface as exemplified below in Figs. 102a and 102b. Interface 110 between color regions 106 and 108 extends perpendicular to surface 102. See Fig. 6a.
Interface 110 can be a flat surface or a curved surface which appears straight along a plane extending through regions 106 and 108 perpendicular to surface 102. Regions 106 and 108 lie on a substructure (or substrate) 134 usually consisting of insulating material at least where they meet substructure 134 along a flat region-substructure interface 136 extending parallel to surface 102.
102031 Largely no light is usually transmitted or emitted by substructure 134 so as to cross interface 136 and exit VC region 106 via SF zone 112. Nor does largely any light usually enter region 106 along interface 110 or any other side surface of region 106 so as to exit it via zone 112. In short, light usually enters region 106 only along zone 112. Changes in the visual appearance of region 106 largely depend only on (a) incident light reflected by region 106 so as to exit it via zone 112, (b) any light emitted by region 106 and exiting it via zone 112, and (c) any light entering region 106 along zone 112, passing through region 106, reflected by substructure 134, passing back through region 106, and exiting it along zone 112.
102041 Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along VC region 106 during the normal state is termed ARsb light. Preferably, no ARsb light is present. All light striking SF zone 112 is preferably absorbed by region 106 or/and reflected by it so as to leave it via zone 112, interface 110, or another such side surface. Region 106, potentially in combination with FC region 108, may be manufactured as a separate unit and later installed on substructure 134. If so, absence of ARsb light enables the color characteristics, including CC characteristics, of region 106 to be independent of the color characteristics of substructure 134.
102051 Light, termed ADic light, normally leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF
zone 112 after being reflected or/and emitted by structure 132, and thus excluding any substructure-reflected ARsb light, consists of (a) light, termed ARic light, normally reflected by structure 132 so as to leave it via zone 112 after striking zone 112 and (b) light (if any), termed AEic light, normally emitted by structure 132 so as to leave it via zone 112. Reflected ARic light is invariably always present. Emitted AEic light may or may not be present. A substantial part of any ARsb light passes through structure 132. ARic light, any AEic light, and any ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112 form A light. Region 106 thereby normally appears as color A. Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
102061 Referring to Figs. 6b and 6c, item 138 is the IDVC portion of VC
region 106, i.e., the changed portion which appears along print area 118 as color X during the changed state. Area 118 is then the upper surface of IDVC portion 138, basically a cylinder whose cross-sectional area is that of area 118. The lateral boundary of portion 138 extends perpendicular to SF zone 112. Object 104 in Figs. 6b and 6c appears above surface 102 at locations corresponding respectively to those in Figs. 5b and 5c and therefore at locations subsequent to impacting OC area 116.
102071 Print area 118 is shown in Figs. 6b and 6c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with extra thick line to clearly identify the print-area location along SF
zone 112. IDVC portion 138 is laterally demarcated in Fig. 6b and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with dotted lines because its location in VC region 106 depends on where object 104 contacts zone 112. Portion 138 is laterally demarcated in Fig.
6c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with a dotted line and the solid line of interface 110 because portion 138 terminates along interface 110 in those drawings. Item 142 in Figs. 6b and 6c is the principal ID segment of ISCC structure 132 in portion 138 and is identical to it here. However, ID ISCC segment 142 is a part of portion 138 in later embodiments of 01 structure 100 where region 106 contains structure besides ISCC structure 132.
102081 Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along IDVC portion 138 during the changed state is termed XRsb light. XRsb light can be the same as, or significantly differ from, ARsb light depending on how the light processing in portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light processing in VC region 106 during the normal state. XRsb light is absent when ARsb light is absent.
102091 Light, termed XDic light, temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 via print area 118 after being reflected or/and emitted by segment 142, and thus excluding any substructure-reflected XRsb light, consists of (a) light, termed XRic light, temporarily reflected by segment 142 so as to leave it via area 118 after striking area 118 and (b) light (if any), termed XEic light, temporarily emitted by segment 142 so as to leave it via area 118.
Reflected XRic light is invariably always present. Emitted XEic light may or may not be present. XDic light differs materially from A and ADic light. A substantial part of any XRsb light passes through segment 142. XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118 form X light so that portion 138 temporarily appears as color X. Each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
Timing and Color-difference Parameters 102101 VC region 106 of 01 structure 130 starts the forward transition from the normal state to the changed state before or after object 104 leaves SF zone 112 depending on the length of duration At during which object 104 contacts OC area 116. Region 106 can even enter the changed state before object 104 leaves zone 112.
However, a person cannot generally see print area 118 until object 104 leaves zone 112. One important timing parameter is thus the full forward transition delay (response time) Ati, if any, extending from the instant, termed object-separation time tos, at which object 104 just fully separates from area 116 to the instant, termed approximate forward transition end time tfe, at which region 106 approximately completes the forward transition and IDVC portion 138 approximately first appears as changed color X. "OS" and "XN" hereafter respectively mean object-separation and transition. Detemiination of full forward XN delay Att is complex because it depends on changes in spectral radiosity JA and thus on wavelength changes rather than on changes in radiosity J itself.
102111 Another important timing parameter is the immediately following time duration At*, discussed above, in which VC region 106 is in the changed state. CC duration Att.
extends from forward XN end time tie to the instant, termed approximate return XN start time t,, at which region 106 approximately starts the return transition from the changed state back to the normal state and IDVC portion 138 approximately starts changing from appearing as color X to returning to appear as color A. Although usually less important than forward XN

delay at, a final important timing parameter is the full return XN delay (relaxation time) At extending from approximate return XN start time t,, to the instant, termed approximate return XN end time t,e, at which region 106 approximately completes the return transition and portion 138 approximately first returns to appearing as color A.
102121 The spectral radiosity constituency, i.e., the variation of spectral radiosity S\ with wavelength A, for a color consists of one or wavelength bands in the visible light spectrum. Each wavelength band may reach one or more peak values of spectral radiosity depending on what is considered to be a wavelength band. Referring to Fig. 7, it illustrates an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 150 for color light such as A or X light where JAh is the top of the illustrated JA range. In this example, Jy, constituency 150 may be viewed as consisting of three wavelength bands or two wavelength bands with the right-most band having two peaks. In any event, the wavelengths encompassed by constituency 150 lie between the low end Ai and high end Ah of the visible spectrum where low-end wavelength A, is nominally 380 - 400 nm and high-end wavelength Ah is nominally 700 -780 nm. For a spectral color, constituency 150 degenerates into a single vertical line at the wavelength of that color.
102131 Fig. 8 shows how an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 152, two bands, for A light changes with time into an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 154, one band, for X light during the forward transition from the normal state to the changed state. The top portion of Fig.
8 illustrates the appearance of color-A J,\ constituency 152 at a time tr, during the normal state and thus prior to the forward transition. Although color-X J,, constituency 154 does not exist at pre-transition time t), thick-line item 154, along the wavelength axis in the top portion of Fig. 8 indicates the expected wavelength extent of color-X constituency 154.
102141 The middle portion of Fig. 8 depicts an exemplary intermediate spectral radiosity constituency 156 at a time tn, during the forward transition. Intermediate J;õ constituency 156 is a combination, largely additive, of a partial version 152,1 of color-A constituency 152 and a partial version 154,, of-color X constituency 154. The right-most band of reduced color-A J), constituency 152,,, combined with the dashed line extending from that band to the right indicates how it would appear if color A were being converted into black. Partial color-X J), constituency 154, combined with the dashed line extending from constituency 154, to the left indicates how constituency 154m would appear if color X were being converted from black. The bottom portion of Fig. 8 illustrates the appearance of color-X constituency 154 at a time tc during the changed state and thus after the forward transition. Although color-A constituency 152 does not exist at post-transition time t,, the two parts of thick-line item 1520 along the wavelength axis in the bottom portion of Fig. 8 indicate the exemplary wavelength extent of constituency 152.
102151 Forward XN delay Atf can be determined by changes in various spectral radiosity parameters as a function of time. Using spectral radiosity J. itself, forward delay Att is the time for spectral radiosity J., to decrease from (0 a high value Jmr, equal to or slightly less than the magnitude A.I --Wiax of the difference between WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934 the maximum JA values for the color-A and color-X JA constituencies at a wavelength present in one or both of them, i.e., at any wavelength for which spectral radiosity J., is greater than zero in at least one of the color A and color-X JA constituencies, to (ii) a low value JAil equal or slightly greater than zero.
102161 This At determination technique is most easily applied at a wavelength present in one of the color-A and color-X JA constituencies but not in the other. Due to noise in experimental Jx. data, the accuracy of the Atf determination is usually increased by choosing a wavelength at which spectral radiosity J,), reaches a peak value. Dotted lines 158 and 160 in each of the three portions of Fig. 8 indicate such wavelengths for J
constituencies 152 and 154. J,, maximum difference magnitude A.4rr3, is then simply the maximum JA value for color-A JA constituency 152 along dotted line 158 in the top portion of Fig. 8 or the maximum JA value for color-X
J,), constituency 154 along dotted line 160 in the bottom portion of Fig. 8.
The length of line 158 or 160 represents difference magnitude AJArnõ.
102171 Spectral radiosity J), can nonetheless be used to determine forward XN delay Att at a wavelength, indicated by dotted line 162 in each of the three portions of Fig. 8, common to both the color-A and color-X JA
constituencies. The length of dotted line 162 represents difference magnitude Alma. As examination of Fig. 8 indicates, difference magnitude .AJArm-a for the common-wavelength situation is usually less than magnitude AJAmax when the color-A JA constituency has a wavelength not in the color-X J
constituency and vice versa.
102181 High value JAfh and low value 41 are respectively slightly less than difference magnitude AJAmax and slightly greater than zero if OS time tos occurs after the instant, termed actual forward XN start time 40, at which VC region 106 actually starts the forward transition to the changed state and IDVC portion 138 actually starts changing to appear as color X or/and if forward XN end time tie occurs before the instant, termed actual forward XN end time too, at which region 106 actually completes the forward transition to the changed state and portion 138 actually first appears as color X. In particular, high value Jmr, equals difference magnitude J.max minus (a) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tos and to if OS time tos occurs after actual forward XN start time tto and (b) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tflrio and tfe if actual forward XN end time taw ends, as usually occurs, after approximate forward XN end time tf,.
Value Jmi, otherwise equals magnitude 102191 Low value JAfi similarly equals (a) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times to, and to if OS time to, occurs after actual forward XN start time to and (b) an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tfloo and tie if actual forward XN end time tilt)) ends after approximate forward XN end time tt. Value If otherwise is zero. The modifications to values JAth and JA ii may be so small as to not significantly affect the Atf determination and, if so, need not be performed. If actual forward XN start time tro occurs after OS time to,, the difference between times t10 and tra should be added to the JA-determined value to obtain actual forward delay Atf. This modification may likewise be so small as to not significantly affect the Atf determination and, if so, need not be performed.
Forward XN delay At can also be WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 determined as an average of the summation of avalues determined at two or more suitable wavelengths using this Atf determination technique.
102201 Another spectral radiosity parameter suitable for use in determining forward XN delay Atf is the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference AJAM, basically an integrated version of the spectral radiosity summation Atf technique. Let J(A) and J,),x(A) respectively represent the spectral radiosities for A and X light as a function of wavelength A for which JA constituencies 152 and 154 are respective examples. Let J,1(A) represent the spectral radiosity for light of wavelength of a variable color, termed variable color M. as a function of wavelength A such that IDVC portion 138 appears along print area 118 as color M. Each .b constituency 152, 154, or 156 is an example of color-M spectral radiosity Jp,m(A). Spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference AJ.,s,m, often simply radiosity difference AJAm, is given by the integral:
AJAivi = fvski,x,A(A) - JAm(A)IdA (Al) where VS indicates that the integration is performed across the visible spectrum.
102211 An understanding of radiosity difference AJAM is facilitated with the assistance of Fig. 9 which, similar to Fig. 8, illustrates how example 152 of color-A spectral radiosity J,A(A) changes into example 154 of color-X spectral radiosity JAx(A) during the forward transition. Example 152 of color-A spectral radiosity JAA(A) occurs at time tp. during the normal state as represented in the top portion of Fig. 9 and is repeated in the middle and bottom portions of Fig. 9 in doffed form because spectral radiosity JA(A) appears in the integrand IJA,A(A)-J,,,m(A)lof radiosity difference AJAM. At time tp, variable color M is color A
so that color M-spectral radiosity Jmo(A) equals color A-spectral radiosity J(A). Radiosity difference AJAm is zero at time tp.
102221 Variable color M is an intermediate color between colors A and X at time tõ, during the forward transition. Color-M spectral radiosity J1(A) then has a wavelength variation between the wavelength variations of spectral radiosities JK,s,(A) and J),x(A). Radiosity difference AJAM at time tir, is thus at some finite value represented by slanted-line area 164 between color-A J.x. constituency 152 and intermediate µ1,,, constituency 156 in Fig. 9. At time tõ during the changed state, variable color M is color X so that color-M spectral radiosity J1(A) equals color-X spectral radiosity JAx(A). Radiosity difference AJAM at time tõ
is also at some finite value represented by slanted-line area 166 between color-A constituency 152 and color-X J., constituency 154 in Fig.
9. The value of radiosity difference AJAM at time tõ is usually a maximum. The variation of radiosity difference Lim with time thereby characterizes the forward transition.
102231 Let AJAx represent the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference ivs14A(A) -JAx(A)IdA between A and X light. Using radiosity difference AJAM, forward XN
delay Atf is the time period for radiosity difference Lim to change from a low value equal or slightly greater than zero to a high value equal to or slightly less than AJAx. If OS time tes occurs after actual forward XN
start time tfo, the low AJAM value is an amount corresponding to the difference between times to, and N. The low AJANI
value can often be taken as zero without significantly affecting the Atf determination. If actual forward XN start time tfo occurs after OS time WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 tõ, the difference between times tio and tõ should be added to the 4-determined Att value to obtain actual forward delay Att. This modification is sometimes so small as to not significantly affect the At determination and, if so, need not be performed. For the usual situation in which approximate forward XN end time tto occurs before actual forward XN end time tfico, the high AJAm value equals LIJAx minus an amount corresponding to the difference between times tmo and tie. The high AJAI,A value can often be taken as AJAX without significantly affecting the Att determination.
102241 Fig. 10 depicts how a general spectral radiosity parameter Jõ varies with time t during a full operational cycle in which VC region 106 goes from the normal state to the changed state and then back to the normal state. General radiosity parameter Jp can be spectral radiosity 4 or spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference AJ.,sid. Radiosity parameter Jp varies between zero and a maximum value J _ pmax formed with difference Almax or the high AJAm value when parameter Jr) is spectral radiosity JA or radiosity difference AJAm. Curve 168 represents the Jp variation with time t.
102251 In addition to times mentioned above, the following times appear along the time axis in Fig. 10: time t, at which object 104 impacts OC area 116, approximate forward XN start time tt., at which VC region 106 approximately starts the forward transition from the normal state to the changed state and IDVC portion 138 approximately starts changing from appearing as color A to appearing as color X, 10%, 50%, and 90% forward XN times trio, t, and tt-i at which portion 138 has respectively changed 10%, 50%, and 90% from actually appearing as color A to actually appearing as color X during the forward transition, actual return XN start time to at which region 106 actually starts the return transition back to the normal state and portion 138 actually starts changing from appearing as color X to returning to appear as color A, 10%, 50%, and 90% return XN times Lo, too, and tso at which region 106 has respectively changed 100/, 50%, and 90%
from actually appearing as color X to actually appearing as color A during the return transition, actual return XN end time trio at which region 106 actually completes the return transition and portion 138 actually first returns to appearing as color A, and time tr.' during the normal state following the return transition.
102261 Using radiosity parameter Jr), 10%, 50%, and 90% forward XN times '410, to. and t190 are instants at which parameter J, actually respectively reaches 10%, 50%, and 90% of maximum value Jpõ,,, during the forward transition. 10%, 50%, and 90% return XN times tao, to, and t90 are instants at which parameter Jp actually has respectively decreased 10%, 50%, and 90% below value Jpõa, during the return transition. Item Atf50 is the 50% forward XN time delay from OS time to, to 50% forward XN time ta during the forward transition.
Item Atff) is the 90% forward XN time delay from time to, to 90% forward XN
time to during the forward transition. Item Atio-so is the 10%-to-90% forward XN time delay from 10%
forward XN time ttli) to time teo during the forward transition. Item Atr50 is the 50% return XN time delay from approximate return XN start time t, to 50% return XN time tr,50 during the return transition. Item Atm is the 90% return XN time delay from time tr, to 90% return XN time t90 during the return transition. Item Atr10.90 is the 10%-to-90% return XN time delay from 10% return XN time tau to time tr90 during the return transition.

102271 Percentage times tflOr t150, tf90, tr10, to, and to can usually be ascertained relatively precisely because dJo/dt, the time rate of change of radiosity parameter Jo, is relatively high in the vicinities of those six times, especially times to and t1f30. Conversely, times tto and trim at which the forward transition actually respectively starts and ends are often difficult to determine precisely because rate dJpidt is relatively ow in their vicinities. Times tic, and two at which the return transition actually respectively starts and ends are likewise often difficult to determine precisely for the same reason. In view of this, the start and end of the forward transition are respectively approximated by times ti s and tie which are relatively precisely determinable utilizing time tf50.
Similarly, the start and end of the return transition are respectively approximated by times trs and te which are relatively precisely determinable utilizing time t150.
102281 In particular, a dotted line 170 having a slope Sf is tangent to curve 168 at point 172 at 50% forward XN time tf50 where radiosity parameter Jp has risen to 50% of value Jpmax.
Slope St equals rate dJpidt at time tiso and can be determined relatively precisely. Time differences t150- tis and tie - to each equal (.1 /2)/S
s_ PrrI3X- _f.
Forward XN start time tis and forward XN end time tfe are:
tfs tf5O- Jprnax/2S1 (A2) tie z: tfjo Ay-flax/2Si (A3) which can be determined relatively precisely because time tf50 can be determined relatively precisely.
[02291 Similarly, a dotted line 174 having a slope S, is tangent to curve 168 at point 176 at 50% return XN
time tt-,-; where parameter Jp has dropped to 50% of value Jpmax. Slope Sr equals rate dJpidt at time to and can be determined relatively precisely. Time differences tiso - trs and tie - tr50 each equal (Jp./2)/Sr. Return XN start time ts and return XN end time tie are:
to Jprnax/2S1 (A4) = tr50 J pmax /2S (A5) which can be determined relatively precisely because time to can be determined relatively precisely.
102301 Approximate full forward XN delay Att is usually no more than 2 s, preferably no more than 1 s, more preferably no more than 0.5 s, even more preferably no more than 0.25 s.
50% forward XN delay AtI50 is usually no more than .1 s, preferably no more than 0.5 s, more preferably no more than 0.25 s, even more preferably no more than 0.125 s. 90% forward XN delay Atf90 is usually less than 2 s, preferably less than 1 s, more preferably less than 0.5 s, even more preferably less than 0.25 s. The same applies to 10%-to-90%
forward XN delay Atf1o_30.
102311 The maximum values for full return XN delay Atr, 10% return XN delay Atm, 50% return XN delay At150, and 90% return XN delay At190 fall into (a) a short-delay category in which they are relatively short to avoid impeding the activity in which object 104 is being used and (b) a long-delay category in which they can be relatively long without significantly impeding that activity and in which their greater lengths can sometimes lead WO 2018/085(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934 to reduction in the cost of manufacturing 01 structure 130. For the short-delay category, return XN delays At, Atrio, At, and Atrx have the same usual and preferred maximum values respectively as forward XN delays Ati, AtfiO, Atrso, and Atm. Return XN delays dtr, Moo, Atr50, and to have the following maximum values for the long-delay category. Delay /It is usually no more than 10 s, preferably no more than 5 s. Delay At150 is usually no more than 5 s, preferably no more than 2.5 s. Delay At,9r) is usually less than 10 s, preferably less than 5 s.
The same applies to delay Atflo_so.
102321 CC duration At*, the difference between return XN start time tr, and forward XN end time tt,,, is:
Atdr tr5 tfe Orrao ""---jr)nla)( \ - V 1 ) f50 -2S; ' tr50 450 Cpmax) (A6) 2 Uf Sr) which likewise can be determined relatively precisely because times tf5r) and tr5r) can both be determined relatively precisely.
102331 Fig. 10 depicts the preferred situation in which OS time t. occurs after actual forward XN start time to. Forward XN start time tto can, however, occur after OS time to,. If so, between times to, and tfo, there is a delay in which radiosity parameter Jp is zero. Fig. 10 depicts the situation in which approximate forward XN start time tts occurs after OS time tc,. Forward XN start time tf, preferably occurs before OS time tos.
102341 The actual total time period Attot,,,t (not indicated in Fig. 10) from actual forward XN start time tfo to actual return XN end time t000 is difficult to determine precisely because times tfo and t, 100 are difficult to determine precisely. Additionally, OS time to, may as mentioned above occur after forward XN stat time to. If so, the short interval between times tp.) and tos is insignificant practically because object 104 blocks print area 118 from then being visible. Approximate return XN end time te is highly representative of when area 118 returns to appearing as principal color A. A useful parameter for dealing with the time period needed to switch from the normal state to the changed state and back to the normal state is the effective total time period Attoteff (also not indicated in Fig. 10) from OS time trõ to return XN end time tr,.
102351 The time period between points in high-level tennis is seldom less than 15 s. If print area 118 generated during a point due to impact of a tennis ball embodying object 104 is desirably not present during the immediately subsequent point, effective total time period Attoteri can be chosen to be no more than 15 s. Area 118 caused by a tennis ball during a point will then automatically not be present during the immediately subsequent point in the vast majority of consecutive-point instances. With full forward XN delay Atr and full return XN delay Atr each being no more than 1 s, automatic value Atji, of CC
duration At is chosen to be close to, but less than, 15 s, e.g., usually at least 10 s, preferably at least 12 s. These /ltd13 values should almost always provide sufficient time to examine area 118 and either immediately determine whether the ball is "in" or "out" or, if possible, extend duration Atdr to examine area 118 more closely.

102361 Non-lobbed groundstrokes hit by highly skilled tennis players typically take roughly 2 s to travel from one baseline to the other baseline and back to the initial baseline. The presence of two or more print areas 118 created during a point is not expected to be significantly distracting to the players. Also, the likelihood of two such areas 118 at least partly overlapping is very low. Nonetheless, if only one area 118 is desirably present at any time during a point, effective total time period Attaht can be chosen to be approximately 2 s. By arranging for each XN delay Att or At to be no more than 0.25 s, automatic duration value Atd,,õ is at least 1.5 S.
This should usually give the players and any associated tennis official(s) enough time to make an immediate in/out determination or, if possible, extend CC duration Atir for more closely examining area 118. In addition, automatic value Atir, can more closely approach 2 s by configuring VC region 106 as described below for Figs.
11a- 11c.
102371 Two colors differ materially if the standard human eyes/brain can essentially instantaneously clearly distinguish the two colors when one of them rapidly replaces the other or when they appear adjacent to each other. Hence, colors A and X differ materially if the standard human eye/brain can essentially instantaneously identify print area 118 when it changes from principal color A to changed color X. If object 104 simultaneously impacts both VC SF zone 112 and FC SF zone 114 in an embodiment of 01 structure 100 where secondary color A of zone 114 is the same as color A, colors A and X also differ materially if the standard human eye/brain can essentially instantaneously determine that object 104 has impacted both of zones 112 and 114 due to the difference in color between area 118 and zone 114.
102381 What constitutes a material difference between colors A and X can sometimes be numerically quantified. In this regard, colors A and X occur in the all-color CIE Vat*
color space in which a color is characterized by a dimensionless lightness L*, a dimensionless green/red hue parameter a*, and a dimensionless blue/yellow hue parameter b*. Lightness V varies from 0 to 100 where a low number indicates dark and a high number indicates light. L* values of 0 and 100 respectively indicate black and white regardless of the a* and b* values. Hue parameters a* and b* have no numerical limits but typically range from a negative value as low as -128 to a positive value as high as 127. For green/red parameter a*, a negative number indicates green and a positive number indicates red. A negative number for blue/yellow parameter indicates blue while a positive number indicates yellow. Colors of particular hues determined by hue parameters a* and b* become lighter as lightness V increases so that the colors contain more white and darker as lighter as lightness L* decreases so that they contain more black.
102391 Hoffmann, "CIE Lab Color Space", docs-hoffmann.deicie1ab03022003.pdf, 10 Feb. 2013, 63 pp., contents incorporated by reference herein, presents the sRGB and AdobeRGB, subspaces of the CIE L*a*b*
color space for Utvalues of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, and 90. For the same L* value, the sRGB and AdobeRGB color subspaces are identical where they overlap. The following material for numerically quantifying how color X differs materially from color A uses the sRGB or AdobeRGB subspace as a baseline for applying the numerical quantification to the full CIE L*a*b* space.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 102401 Colors A and X have respective lightnesses LA* and Lx*, respective green/red parameters aA* and ax*, and respective blue/yellow parameters bA* and bx* whose values are restricted so that color X differs materially from color A. In a first general L*a*b* restriction embodiment, suitable minimum and maximum limits are placed on one or more of lightness pair LA* and Lx*, red/green parameter pair aA* and ax*, and blue/yellow parameter pair bA* and bx* to define one or more pairs of mutually exclusive (non-overlapping) color regions for which any color in one of a pair of the color regions differs materially from any color in the other of that pair of color regions. Any color in one of each pair of the color regions embodies color A while any color in the other of that pair of color regions embodies color X and vice versa.
102411 The color regions in one such pair of mutually exclusive color regions consist of a light region containing a selected one of colors A and X and a dark region containing the remaining one of colors A and X.
Lightness LA* or Lx* of selected color A or X in the light region is at least 60 greater than lightness Lx* or LA* of remaining color X or A in the dark region. Selected-color lightness LA* or Lx*
ranges from a minimum of 60 up to 100 while remaining-color lightness Lx* or LA* ranges from 0 to a maximum of 40 provided that lightnesses LA*
and Lys' differ by at least 60. Selected color A or X is a light color while remaining color X or A is a dark color.
Each color A or X can be at any values of parameters aA* and bA* or ax* and bx*. Lightness difference AL*, i.e., the magnitude ILX* - LA*I of the difference between lightnesses Lx* and LA*, is at least 60, preferably at least 70, often at least 80, sometimes at least 90.
102421 Let Aa* represent the magnitude lax* - aA*I of the difference between green/red parameters ax* and aA*, tib* represent the magnitude Ibx' - bA*I of the difference between blue/yellow parameters bx* and bA*, and CAW represent the weighted color difference (CiAL*2 + C3AaA2 + Q,Ab*2)"2 where CL. Ca, and Cb are non-negative weighting constants usually ranging from 0 to 1 but potentially as high as 9. Limits, almost invariably minimum limits, are placed on one or more of differences AL*, Aa*, Ab*, and IIIN* in a second general L*a*b*
restriction embodiment such that color X differs materially from color A. In one example, each difference AL* or Aa* is at least 50. Each parameter bA* or bx* can be at any value. Hence, no minimum limit is placed on difference Ab*. Weighted color difference AW* is not used in this example.
102431 Weighted color difference AW* can, in other examples, be used (i) alone since differences AL*, Aa*, and Ab* appear in the AW* formula (CLAL*2 +C,Aa*2 + Cr,Ab*2)1,2 or (ii) in combination with one or more of differences AL*, Aa*, and Ab*. In either case, color difference CAW is greater than or equal to a threshold weighted difference value AW*. When used alone, threshold weighted difference value AWthis sufficiently high that colors A and X materially differ for all pairs of LA*and Lx* values, aA.*
and ax* values, and bA* and by,* values.
Examination of the sRGB or AdobeRGB I.* examples in Hoffmann indicates that color differences are more pronounced in green/red parameter a* than in blue/yellow parameter b*. In view of this, one of constants CL and Ca in the AW* formula is sometimes greater than constant Cb while the other of constants CL and Ca in the CAW
formula is greater than or equal to constant C. Constants CL and C, for this situation are typically 1 with constant Ch being 0.

102441 A third general L*a*b* restriction embodiment combines placing limits on one or more of lightnesses LA* and Lx*, red/green parameters aA* and ax*, and blue/yellow parameters bA*
and bx* with placing limits on one or more of differences AL*, Aa*, Ab*, and AVV* such that color X differs materially from color A. In one example, lightness LA* or Lx* of each color A or X is at least 50 while red/green parameter difference Aa* is at least 70. No limitation is placed on parameter aA*, ax*, bA*, or bx*, lightness difference AL*, or blue/yellow parameter difference AbA in this example.
102451 Specific examples of pairs of materially different colors suitable for colors A and X, including some pairs covered in the three general Va*b* restriction embodiments, include: (a) white and a non-white color having an L* value of no more than 80, preferably no more than 70: (b) an off-white color having an V value of at least 95 and a darker color having an V value of no more than 75, preferably no more than 65; (c) a reddish color having an a* value of at least 20, preferably at least 30, and a greenish color having an a* value of no more than -20, preferably no more than -30, each color having an V value of at least 30, preferably at least 40: and (d) a reddish color having a b* value of at least 75 plus 1.6 times its a*
value and a bluish color having a b* value of -10 minus 1.0 times its a* value, each color having an L* value of at least 30, preferably at least 40.
Numerous other pairs of materially different colors, including numerous pairs of light and dark colors, are suitable for colors A and X.
102461 Colors A and X often have different average wavelengths Aõg. In terms of spectral radiosity JA, the average wavelength A3 of of light of a particular color is:
f AJAQMA
Avg _ VS (A7) fvs JA(A)dA
Average wavelength Aõ, is zero for black and approximately 550 nm for white.
The ratio R,,3iq of the difference between the average wavelengths of X and A light to the average of their average wavelengths is:
214vgX AavgAl RAavg (A8) AavgX AavgA
where Aõgx and 11/4õ,gA respectively are the average wavelengths of X and A
light as determined from the Aa.0 relationship. In some embodiments of 01 structure 100, wavelength difference-to-average ratio RAavg is at least 0.06, preferably at least 0.08, more preferably at least 0.10, even more preferably at least 0.12.
Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region Formed with Impact-sensitive Changeably Reflective or Changeably Emissive Material 102471 1SCC structure 132 can be embodied in many ways. Structure 132 is sometimes basically a single material consisting of impact-sensitive changeably reflective or changeably emissive material where "changeably reflective" means that color change occurs primarily due to change in light reflection (and associated light absorption) and where "changeably emissive" means that color change occurs primarily due to change in light emission. "CR" and "CE" hereafter respectively mean changeably reflective and changeably emissive.
102481 First consider ISCC structure 132 consisting solely of impact-sensitive CR material. "IS" hereafter means impact-sensitive. During the normal state, CR ISCC structure 132 reflects ARic light striking SF zone 112. No significant amount of light is normally emitted by structure .132.
Including any ARsb light passing through structure 132, A light is formed with ARic light and any ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112.
102491 The IS CR material forming ISCC segment 142 temporarily reflects XRic light striking print area 118 in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH impact criteria. As in the normal state, CR ISCC segment 142 does not emit any significant amount of light during the changed state. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 142, X light is formed with XRic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118.
102501 The mechanism causing CR ISCC segment 142 to temporarily reflect XRic light is pressure or/and deformation at OC area 116 or/and SF DF area 122 due to the impact. The IS CR
material is typically piezochromic material which temporarily changes color when subjected to a change in pressure, here at print area 118. Examples of piezochromic material are described in Fukuda, inorganic Chromotropistn: Basic Concepts and Applications of Colored Materials (Springer), 2007, pp. 28 - 32, 37, 38, and 199 - 238, and the references cited on those pages, contents incorporated by reference herein.
102511 When ISCC structure 132 consists solely of impact-sensitive CE
material, CE ISCC structure 132 may or may not significantly emit AEic light during the normal state.
Structure 132 normally reflects ARic light striking SF zone 112. Including any ARsb light passing through structure 132, A light is formed with ARic light and any AEic and ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112.
102521 The IS CE material forming ISCC segment 142 temporarily emits XEic light in response to the impact so as to meet the TH impact criteria. During the changed state, CE ISCC
segment 142 usually reflects ARic light striking print area 118. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 142, X light is formed with XEic and ARic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118. Alternatively, the temporary emission of XEic light may so affect segment 142 that it temporarily largely ceases to reflect ARic light striking area 118 and, instead, temporarily reflects XRic light materially different from ARic light. X light is now formed with XEic and XRic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and therefore portion .138, via area 118.
102531 The mechanism causing CE ISCC segment 142 to temporarily emit XEic light is pressure or/and deformation at SF DF area 122 due to the impact. If there normally is no significant AEic light, the IS CE
material is typically piezolurninescent material which temporarily emits light (luminesces) upon being subjected WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/U S2017/(157934 to a change in pressure, here at print area 118. Examples of piezoluminescent material are presented in "Piezoluminescence", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piezoluminescence, 16 Mar. 2013, 1 p., and the references cited therein, contents incorporated by reference herein. If there normally is significant AEic light, the IS CE material is typically piezochromic luminescent material which continuously emits light whose color changes when subjected to a change in pressure, again here at area 118.
102541 CC duration iltd, is usually automatic value Atdr,i, formed by base portion Atdrt), passively determined by the properties of the IS CR or CE material. VC region 106 may contain componentry, described below, which excites the CR or CE material so as to automatically extend automatic value Atd,a,) by amount LltdFext beyond base duration ttbs.
Object-impact Structure Having Separate Impact-sensitive and Color-change Components 102551 VC region 106 often contains multiple subregions stacked one over another up to SF zone 112. A
recitation that light of a particular species, i.e., light identified by one or more alphabetic or alphanumeric characters, leaves a specified one of these subregions mean that the light leaves the specified subregion along zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or, if the specified subregion adjoins another subregion lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along the adjoining subregion, i.e., via the interface between the two subregions. A recitation that light of a particular species leaves a segment or part of the specified subregion similarly mean that the light leaves that segment or subregion part along the corresponding segment or part of zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or, if the specified subregion adjoins another subregion lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along the corresponding segment or part of the adjoining subregion, i.e., via the corresponding segment or part of the interface between the two subregions.
102561 Figs. 11a - 11c (collectively "Fig. 11") illustrate an embodiment 180 of 01 structure 130 in which VC
region 106 is again formed solely with ISCC structure 132. Region 106, and thus structure 132, here consists of a principal IS component 182 and a principal CC component 184 that meet at a flat principal light-transmission interface 186 extending parallel to SF zone 112 and interface 136. See Fig.
11a. IS component 182 extends between zone 112 and interface 186. CC component 184 extends between interfaces 186 and 136 and therefore between IS component 182 and substructure 134.
102571 Light travels through IS component 182, usually transparent, from SF
zone 112 to interface 186 and vice versa. Preferably, largely no light striking CC component 184 along interface 186 passes fully through component 184 to interface 136. All light striking component 184 along interface 186 is preferably absorbed and/or reflected by component 184 so that there is no substructure-reflected ARsb or XRsb light.
102581 Light, termed ADoc light, normally leaves CC component 184 after being reflected or/and emitted by it during. ADcc light, which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a) light, termed ARcc light, normally reflected by component 184 so as to leave it via interface 186 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS
component 182 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcc light, normally emitted by component 184 so as to leave it via interface 186. Reflected ARcc light which is of wavelength for a normal reflected main color ARcc is invariably always present. Emitted AEcc light which is of wavelength for a normal emitted main color AEcc may or may not be present.
102591 Any ARsb light passes in substantial part through CC component 184.
The total light, termed ATcc light, normally leaving component 184 (along IS component 182) consists of ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARsb light leaving component 184. Substantial parts of the ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARsb light pass through IS component 182. In addition, component 182 may normally reflect light, termed ARis light, which leaves it via SF zone 112 after striking zone 112. A light is formed with ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any ARis and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. Each of ADcc light and either ARcc or AEcc light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of A and ADic light.
102601 Referring to Figs. 11b and 11c, item 192 is the ID segment of IS
component 182 present in IDVC
portion 138. Print area 118 is the upper surface of ID segment 192. Item 194 is the underlying ID segment of CC component 184 present in portion 138. Item 196 is the ID segment of interface 186 present in portion 138.
"IF" hereafter means interface. Component segments 192 and 194, respectively termed IS and CC segments, meet along segment 196 of interface 186.
102611 Responsive to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH
impact criteria, ID IS
segment 192 provides a principal general ID impact effect usually resulting from the pressure of the impact on area 116 or from deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF area 122. The general ID impact effect is typically an electrical effect consisting of one or more electrical signals but can be in other form depending on the configuration and operation of IS component 182. IS segment 192 can generate the impact effect piezoelectrically as described below for Figs. 24a, 24b, 25a, and 25b or using a resistive touchscreen technique.
102621 The general impact effect is furnished directly to CC component 184, specifically to ID CC segment 194, in some general 01 embodiments. If so or if component 184, likewise specifically segment 194, in other general 01 embodiments is provided with the general CC control signal generated in response to the impact effect for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments as described below, CC segment 194 responds to the effect or to the control signal by changing in such a way that light, termed XDoc light, temporarily leaves segment 194 after being reflected or/and emitted by it as VC region 106 goes to the changed state. XDcc light, which excludes any XRsb light, consists of (a) light, termed XRcc light, temporarily reflected by segment 194 so as to leave it via ID
IF segment 196 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and (b) light (if any), termed XEcc light, temporarily emitted by CC segment 194 so as to leave it via IF
segment 196. Reflected XRcc light which is of wavelength for a temporary reflected main color XRcc is invariably always present. Emitted XEcc light which is of wavelength for a temporary emitted main color XEcc may or may not be present.
10263] Any XRsb light passes in substantial part through CC segment 194.
The total light, termed XTec light, temporarily leaving segment 194 (along IS segment 192) consists of XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any XRsb light leaving segment 194. Substantial parts of the XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any XRsb light pass through IS segment 192. Since IS component 182 may reflect ARis light during the normal state, segment 192 may reflect ARis light which leaves it via print area 118 during the changed state. X light is formed with XRcc light, any XEcc light, and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. XDoc light differs materially from A, ADic, and ADcc light. Each of XDcc light and either XRcc or XEcc light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of X and XDic light.
102641 If the basic TH impact criteria consist of multiple sets (Si- Sn) of different principal basic TH impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors (Xi -Xr) materially different from principal color A. the principal general impact effect consists of one of multiple different principal specific impact effects respectively corresponding to the specific changed colors. IS component 182, specifically IS segment 192, provides the general impact effect as the specific impact effect for the basic TH criteria set (Si) met by the impact. CC component 184, specifically CC segment 194, responds (a) in some general 01 embodiments to that specific impact effect or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal then generated in response to that specific effect sometimes dependent on the above-mentioned other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments, by causing IDVC portion 138 to appear as the specific changed color (X) for that criteria set. The control signal may, for example, be generatable at multiple control conditions respectively associated with the criteria sets. The control signal is then actually generated at the control condition for the criteria set met by the impact.
102651 X light advantageously generally becomes more distinct from A light as the ratio RAReADõ of the radiosity of ARis light leaving IS component 182 during the normal state to the radiosity of ADcc light leaving component 182 during the normal state decreases and as the ratio RAF=deXpcx of the radiosity of ARis light leaving IS segment 192 during the changed state to the radiosity of XDoc light leaving segment 192 during the changed state likewise decreases. The radiosity of ARis light during the normal and changed states is usually made as small as reasonably feasible. The sum of radiosity ratios RARis/ADõ and RARisjynõ is usually no more than 0.4, preferably no more than 0.3, more preferably no more than 0.2, even more preferably no more than 0.1.
102661 Performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations with separate components 182 and 184 provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of jointly performing those operations. As a result, the ambit of colors for embodying colors A and X is increased. Different shades of the embodiments of colors A
and X existent in the absence of ARis light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of IS
component 182, specifically the wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARis light, without changing CC
component 184. Print area 118 can be even better matched to OC area 116. The ruggedness, especially the ability to successfully withstand impacts, is enhanced. Consequently, the lifetime can be increased.
102671 The ability to select and control the CC timing, both CC duration Ltd, and the XN delays, is improved. Full forward XN delay titf can be as high as 0.4s, sometimes as high as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is usually reduced to no more than 0.2 s, preferably no more than 0.1 s, more preferably no more than 0.05 s, even more preferably no more than 0.025 s. 50% forward XN delay Atf50 correspondingly can be as high as 0.2 s, sometimes as high as 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 s but is usually reduced to no more than 0.1 s, preferably no more than 0.05 s, more preferably no more than 0.025 s, even more preferably no more than 0.0125 s. These low maximum usual and preferred values for delays Atf and to are highly advantageous when the activity is a sport such as tennis in which players and any official(s) need to make quick decisions on the impact locations of a tennis ball embodying object 104.
102681 The last 10% of the actual print-area transition from color A to color X is comparatively long in some embodiments of 01 structure 180. As a resutt, the time period from OS time tos to actual forward XN end time tfloo is considerably greater than approximate full forward delay Att. See Fig. 10. In such embodiments, the comparatively long duration of the last 10% of the A-to-X transition is generally not significant because a person viewing surface 102 can usually readily identify print area 118 when it is close to, but not exactly, color X. In view of these considerations, 90% forward XN delay Attic; and 10%-to-90%
forward XN delay Atti0-90 are important timing parameters. Since 90% forward delay /490 starts at OS time to., whereas 10%-to-90% forward delay Atiio_T starts at 10% forward XN time tfio, delay Atf90 can be greater than or less than delay Atfio_T
depending on whether OS time to, occurs before or after 10% forward XN time tt. By forming ISCC structure 132 with components 182 and 184, especially when CC component 184 is configured as described below for Figs. 12a - 12c, each delay Atf90 or Attio_90 can be as high as 0.4 s, sometimes as high as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is usually less than 0.2 s, preferably less than 0.1 s, more preferably less than 0.05 s, even more preferably less than 0.025 s. This is likewise particularly advantageous when the activity is a sport such as tennis in which quick decisions are needed on tennis-ball impact locations.
102691 OC duration although usually quite small, can be long enough that 90% forward XN time trx, occurs before OS time tõ when ISCC structure 132 is formed with components 182 and 184. If so, 90% forward XN delay Atf90 and 10%-to-90% forward XN delay Atf10.90 become zero. Also, approximate forward XN end time tie may occur before OS time 6. If so, full forward delay /,:tf drops to zero.
50% forward XN delay Ati50 also drops to zero and, in fact, becomes zero whenever time tfso occurs before OS
time tos.
102701 A consequence of the reduced maximum At, Atiso, Atf90, and Attio-90 values arising from forming ISCC structure 132 with components 182 and 184 is that return XN delays Atr, Atm, Atm, and Atfio-so are WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 reduced. Approximate full return XN delay Atr usually has the same reduced maximum values as full forward delay Att. 50% return XN delay At150 usually has the same reduced maximum values as 50% forward delay Att5Ø
90% return XN delay At-90 and 10%-to-90% return XN delay At110_90 usually have the same reduced maximum values as forward delays Atm and Atf10-90.
102711 The general impact effect can be transmitted outside VC region 106.
For instance, the effect can take the form of a general location-identifying impact signal supplied to a separate general CC duration controller as described below for Figs. 54a and 54b or a characteristics-identifying impact signal supplied to a separate general intelligent CC controller as described below for Figs. 64a and 64b. The effect can also take the form of multiple cellular location-identifying impact signals supplied to a separate cell CC duration controller as described below for Figs. 59a and 59b or multiple characteristics-identifying impact signals supplied to a separate intelligent cell CC controller as described below for Figs. 69a and 69b. When a duration controller is used, the effect is also provided to ID portion 138, or is converted into the general CC control signal provided to portion 138, for producing a color change at print area 118. However, the effect is not provided to portion 138 or always converted into the control signal when an intelligent controller is used. Instead, the intelligent controller makes a decision to provide, or not provide, portion 138 with a CC initiation signal which implements, or leads to the generation of, the control signal that produces a color change at area .118.
102721 The positions of components 182 and 184 can sometimes be reversed so that IS component 182 extends between CC component 184 and substructure 134. SF zone 112 is then the upper surface of component 184. Components 182 and 184 still meet at interface 186. In this reversal, the pressure of the impact on OC area 116 or the deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF
area 122 is transmitted pressure-wise through component 184 to produce excess internal pressure atIF
segment 196. IS segment 192 responds to the excess internal pressure at IF segment 196, and thus to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet excess internal pressure criteria that embody the TH impact criteria, by providing the general impact effect supplied to CC segment 194 or/and outside VC region 106 for potential generation of the general CC
control signal.
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Changeably Reflective or Changeably Emissive Color-change Component 102731 CC component 184 in 01 structure 180 can be embodied in various ways to perform the CC
function in accordance with the invention. In one group of embodiments, the core of the mechanism used to achieve color changing is light reflection (and associated light absorption).
Component 184 in these embodiments is, for simplicity, termed "CR component 184" where "CR" again means changeably reflective.
Light emission is the core of the mechanism used to achieve color changing in another group of embodiments.

Component 184 in these other embodiments is termed "CE component 184" where "CE" again means changeably emissive.
102741 Beginning with CR component 184, no significant amount of light is emitted by it so as to leave it during the normal or changed state. Starting with the normal state, CR
component 184 normally reflects ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Normal reflected main color ARcc may be termed the first reflected main color. Including any ARis light normally reflected by IS component 182 and any ARsb light passing through it, A light is formed with ARcc light and any ARis and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. ARcc light, a reflective implementation of ADcc light here, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of A
light.
102751 Responsive (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments, ID segment 194 of CR component 184 temporarily reflects XRcc light, materially different from ARcc light, which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the changed state. Temporary reflected main color XRcc may be termed the second reflected main color. If IS
component 182 normally reflects ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light. Including any XRsb light passing through segment 192, X light is formed with XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138. XRcc light, a reflective implementation of XDcc light here, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of X light.
102761 CR component 184 is an electrochromic structure or a photonic crystal structure in a basic embodiment An electrochromic structure contains electrochromic material which temporarily changes color upon undergoing a change in electronic state, such as a change in charge condition resulting from a change in electric field across the material, in response to an electrical-effect implementation of the general impact effect provided by IS segment 192. Examples of electrochromic material are described in Fukuda, Inorganic Chromotropistn: Basic Concepts and Applications of Colored Materials (Springer), 2007, pp. 34 - 38 and 291 -336, and the references cited on those pages, contents incorporated by reference herein. Alternatively, CR
component 184 is one or more of the following light-processing structures in which the light processing generally involves reflecting light off particles: a dipolar suspension structure, an electrofluidic structure, an electrophoretic structure, and an electrowelling structure. CR component 184 may also be a reflective liquid-crystal structure or a reflective microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure such as an interferometric modulator structure or a transflective digital micro shutter structure.

[02771 CE component 184 can be embodied to operate in either of two modes termed the single-emission and double-emission modes. These two embodiments of CE component 184 are respectively termed single-emission CE component 184 and double-emission CE component 184.
102781 For single-emission CE component 184, the normal and changed states of VC region 106 can be respectively designated as non-emissive and emissive states because significant light emission occurs during the changed state but not during the normal state. Single-emission CE
component 184 operates the same during the normal (non-emissive) state as CR component 184.
102791 Responsive (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments, ID segment 194 of single-emission CE component 184 temporarily emits XEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the changed (emissive) state. CC segment 194 usually continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. XEcc and ARcc light form XDcc light. Since IS component 182 may normally reflect ARis light, segment 192 may reflect ARis light.
Including any XRsb light passing through segment 192, X light is formed with XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus 1DVC portion 138. XEcc tight, an emissive component of XDcc light here, differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, and ARcc light. Either XEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
102801 Alternatively, the emission of XEcc light may so affect CC segment 194 of single-emission CE
component 184 during the changed state that segment 194 ceases to reflect ARcc light and, instead, temporarily reflects XRcc light significantly different from ARcc light The XRcc light passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. XEcc and XRcc light now form XDcc light The processing of any ARis and XRsb light is the same. X light is then formed with XEcc and XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or XRcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
102811 Turning to double-emission CE component 184, the normal and changed states of VC region 106 can be respectively designated as first emissive and second emissive states because significant light emission occurs during both the normal and changed states. Double-emission CE component 184 operates as follows during the normal (first emissive) state. For the normal state, CE component 184 normally emits AEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Normal emitted main color AEcc may be termed the first emitted main color. CE component 184 usually normally reflects ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Including any ARis light normally reflected by component 182 and any ARsb light passing through it, A light is formed with AEcc and ARcc light and any ARis and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. Either AEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority component of A light.

10282] Double-emission CE component 184 responds, during the changed (second emissive) state, (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments basically the same as single-emission CE component 184 responds during the changed (emissive) state. In particular, ID segment 194 of double-emission CE component 184 temporarily emits XEcc light which passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. Temporary emitted main color XEcc, which may be termed the second emitted main color, differs materially from normal (or first) emitted main color AEcc. CC segment 194 can implement this change by ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc light or by ceasing to emit one or more components, but not all, of AEcc light, potentially accompanied by emitting additional light.
102831 During the changed state, ID segment 194 of double-emission CE
component 184 usually continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. Since IS component 182 may normally reflect ARis light, segment 192 may again reflect ARis light.
Including any XRsb light passing through segment 192, X light is formed with XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority component of X light.
102841 Alternatively, the emission of XEcc light may so affect ID segment 194 of double-emission CE
component 184 that CC segment 194 temporarily ceases to reflect ARcc light and instead temporarily reflects XRcc light which passes through IS segment 192. Subject to segment 194 changing from emitting AEcc light to emitting XEcc light by ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc light or by ceasing to emit one or more components, but not all, of AEcc light, possibly accompanied by emitting additional light, the operation of double-emission CE component 184 during the changed state in this alternative is the same as that of single-emission CE component 184 during the changed state in the corresponding alternative.
102851 Both the single-emission and double-emission embodiments of CE
component 184 are advantageous because use of light emission to produce changed color X enables print area 118 to be quite bright, thereby enhancing visibility of the color change. CE component 184, either embodiment, may variously be one or more of the following light-processing structures that emit light: a backlit liquid-crystal structure, a cathodoluminescent structure, a digital light processing structure, an electrochromic fluorescent structure, an electrochromic luminescent structure, an electrochromic phosphorescent structure, an electroluminescent structure, an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure (such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure), a field-emission structure, a laser phosphor (display) structure, a light-emitting diode structure, a light-emitting electrochemical cell structure, a liquid-crystal-over-silicon structure, an organic fight-emitting diode structure, an organic light-emitting transistor structure, a photoluminescent structure, a plasma panel structure, a quantum-dot light-emitting diode structure, a surface-conduction-emission structure, a telescopic pixel (display) structure, and a vacuum fluorescent (display) structure. Organic light-emitting diode structures are of particular interest because they provide bendability for impact resistance.
102861 The above-described situation in which the positions of components 182 and 184 are reversed is particularly suitable for embodying CC component 184 as a CR CC component, especially an electrochromic or photonic crystal structure, or a CE CC component, especially an electrochromic fluorescent, electrochromic luminescent, electrochromic phosphorescent structure, or electroluminescent structure.
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Color-change Component that Utilizes Electrode Assembly 102871 Figs. 12a - 12c (collectively "Fig. 12") illustrate an embodiment 200 of 01 structure 180 and thus of 01 structure 130. CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 consists of a principal electrode assembly 202, an optional principal near (first) auxiliary layer 204 extending between electrode assembly 202 and interface 186 to meet IS component 182, and an optional principal far (second) auxiliary layer 206 extending between assembly 202 and substructure 134. See Fig. 12a. The adjectives "near" and "far" are used to differentiate near auxiliary layer 204 and far auxiliary layer 206 relative to their distances from SF zone 112, far auxiliary layer 206 being farther from zone 112 than near auxiliary layer 204. "NA" and "FA" hereafter respectively mean near auxiliary and far auxiliary. Assembly 202, NA layer 204, and FA layer and 206 all usually extend parallel to one another and parallel to zone 112 and interface 136.
102881 NA layer 204, if present, usually contains insulating material for isolating IS component 182 and assembly 202 from each other as necessary. FA layer 206, if present, usually contains insulating material for appropriately isolating assembly 202 from substructure 134 as desired.
Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may perform other functions. Electrical conductors may be incorporated into NA
layer 204 for electrically connecting selected parts of component 182 to selected parts of assembly 202. If VC
region 106, potentially in combination with FC region 108, is manufactured as a separate unit and later installed on substructure 134, FA layer 206 protects assembly 202 during the time between manufacture of the unit and its installation on substructure 134.
In some liquid-crystal embodiments of CC component 184, NA layer 204 includes a polarizer while FA layer 206 includes a polarizer and either a light reflector or a light emitter.
102891 Light travels from interface 186 through NA layer 204, usually transparent, to assembly 202 and vice versa. Hence, light leaves assembly 202 along layer 204. In some embodiments of CC component 184, light also travels from interface 186 through both NA layer 204 and assembly 202 to FA layer 206 and vice versa. Light leaves FA layer 206 along assembly 202 in those embodiments.
Preferably, no light striking layer 206 along assembly 202 passes fully through layer 206 to interface 136 during the normal or changed state. In particular, all light striking layer 206 along assembly 202 is preferably either absorbed or reflected by layer 206 so that there is no ARsb or XRsb light.

102901 Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may or may not be significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. If layer 204 or 206 is significantly involved in determining color change, the involvement is usually passive. That is, light processed by layer 204 or 206 undergoes changes largely caused by changes in light processed by assembly 202 rather than partly or fully by changes in the physical or/and chemical characteristics of layer 204 or 206.
102911 FA layer 206 (if present) operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal general far auxiliary mode or one of several versions of a light outputting normal general far auxiliary mode depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted. "GFA" hereafter means general far auxiliary. Largely no light leaves FA layer 206 along assembly 202 in the light non-outputting normal GFA mode. The light outputting normal GFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (i) any ARsb light passes in substantial part through layer 206 and (ii) light, termed ADfa light, is reflected or/and emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202.
102921 ADfa light, which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARfa light, normally reflected by FA layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS
component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), and assembly 202 and (b) light (if any), termed AEfa light, normally emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202. Reflected ARfa light is typically present when ADfa light is present. The total light (if any), termed ATfa light, leaving layer 206 in the light outputting normal GFA
mode consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided directly by layer 206 and any ARsb light passing through it.
This operation of layer 206 applies to situations in which it is both significantly used, and not used, in determining color change along zone 112.
102931 Taking note that NA layer 204 may not be present in CC component 184, a recitation that light leaves assembly 202 means that the light leaves it along IS component 182, and thus via interface 186, if layer 204 is absent. Assembly 202 operates during the normal state according to a light non-outputting normal general assembly mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting normal general assembly mode depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted. "GAB" hereafter means general assembly. Largely no light normally leaves assembly 202 along NA layer 204 in the light non-outputting normal GAB mode. The light outputting normal GAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light pass through assembly 202, and (iii) light, termed ADab light, is reflected or/and emitted by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer 204.
102941 ADab light, which excludes any ARfa or ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARab light, normally reflected by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer 204 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS component 182, and layer 204 and (b) light (if any), termed AEab light, normally emitted by assembly 202 so as to leave it along layer 204. Reflected ARab light is typically present when ADab light is present The WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934 total light, termed ATab light, leaving assembly 202 in the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of any ARab and AEab light provided directly by assembly 202, any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
102951 ADfa light is present in some versions, but absent in other versions, of the light outputting normal GAB mode. When ADfa light is absent, ARsb light is also usually absent.
Emitted AEab light is typically absent from the light outputting normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa light is present in it and vice versa. Either ADab or ADfa light, and therefore one of ARab, AEab, ARfa, and AEfa light, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of A, ADic, and ADcc light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
102961 Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light leaving assembly 202 pass through NA layer 204. In addition, layer 204 may normally reflect light, termed ARna light, which leaves it via interface 186 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and which thus excludes any ARab. ARfa, or ARsb light. Total ATcc light normally leaving layer 204, and therefore CC component 184, consists of any assembly-provided ARab and AEab light passing through layer 204, any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through it, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
102971 Inasmuch as any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light leaving NA
layer 204 form ATab light leaving layer 204 via interface 186, ATcc light leaving CC component 184 is also expressed as consisting of ATab light and any ARna light leaving layer 204. Also, any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARna light leaving layer 204 form ADcc light leaving component 184. Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light leaving component 184 pass through IS component 182. Including any ARis light reflected by component 182, A light is formed with any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
102981 Changes in the color of IDVC portion 138 occur due to changes in assembly 202 in responding (a) in first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect provided by IS
segment 192 for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in second general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments. The assembly changes are sometimes accompanied, as mentioned above, by changes in the light processed by NA layer 204, if present, or/and FA layer 206, if present.
Referring to Figs. 12b and 12c with this in mind, item 212 is the ID segment of assembly 202 present in portion 138. Items 214 and 216 respectively are the ID segments of auxiliary layers 204 and 206 present in portion 138.
102991 During the changed state, ID segment 216 of FA layer 206 (if present) temporarily operates, usually passively, according to a light non-outputting changed GFA mode or one of several versions of a light outpufting changed GFA mode. Largely no light leaves FA segment 216 along ID assembly segment 212 in the light non-outputting changed GFA mode, "AB" hereafter meaning assembly. The light outputting changed GFA mode consists of one or both of the following actions: (i) any XRsb light passes in substantial part through FA segment 216 and (ii) light, termed XDfa light, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 216 so as to leave it along AB
segment 212.
103001 XDfa light, which excludes any XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRfa light, temporarily reflected by FA segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192, ID segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if present), and AB segment 212 and (b) light (if any), termed XEfa light, temporarily emitted by FA segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212.
Reflected XRfa light is typically present when XDfa light is present.
Reflection of XRfa light or/and emission of XEfa light leaving FA segment 216 along AB segment 212 usually occur under control of segment 212 in response (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments.
If FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light or/and emits AEfa light, a change in which largely no light temporarily leaves FA segment 216 likewise usually occurs under control of AB segment 212 in responding to the impact effect or to the control signal. The total light (if any), termed XTfa light, leaving FA segment 216 in the light outputting changed GFA mode consists of any XRfa and XEfa light provided directly by segment 216 and any XRsb light passing through it.
103011 The foregoing operation of FA segment 216 applies to situations in which FA layer 206 is both significantly used, and not used, in determining color change along print area 118. XDfa light usually differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, and ADfa light if layer 206 is significantly involved in determining color change along area h. The same applies usually to XRfa and XEfa light if both are present and, of course, to XRfa or XEfa light if it is present but respective XEfa or XRfa light is absent.
103021 Again noting that NA layer 204 may not be present in CC component 184, a recitation that light leaves AB segment 212 means that the light leaves segment 212 along IS segment 192, and thus via IF
segment 196, if layer 204 is absent. During the changed state, AB segment 212 responds (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general CC
control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by temporarily operating according to a light non-outputting changed GAB mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting changed GAB mode. Largely no light leaves segment 212 along NA
segment 214 in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode. The light outputting changed GAB mode consists of one or more of the following actions: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa fight pass through segment 212, and (iii) light, termed XDab light, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214.

103031 XDab light, which excludes any XRfa or XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRab light, temporarily reflected by AB segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 and (b) light (if any), termed XEab light, temporarily emitted by AS segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214. Reflected XRab light is typically present when XDab light is present. The total light, termed XTab light, leaving AS
segment 212 in the light outputting changed GAB mode consists of any XRab and XEab light provided directly by segment 212, any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
103041 XDfa light is present in some versions, but is absent in other versions, of the light outputting changed GAB mode. When XDfa light is absent, XRsb light is also usually absent. Emitted XEab light is typically absent from the light outputting changed GAB mode when emitted XEfa light is present in it and vice versa. XDab light usually differs materially from A. ADic, ADcc, ADab, and ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. The same applies usually to XRab and XEab light if both are present and, of course, to XRab or XEab light if it is present but respective XEab or XRab light is absent. Either XDab or XDfa light, and thus one of XRab, XEab, XRfa, and XEfa light, is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of X, XDic, and XDcc light depending on the configuration and constitution of subcomponents 202, 204, and 206.
103051 Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light leaving AS segment 212 pass through NA segment 214. In addition, segment 214 may reflect light, termed XRna light, which leaves it via IF
segment 196 during the changed state after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and which thus excludes any XRab, XRfa, or XRsb light. XRna light is usually largely ARna light. If NA segment 214 undergoes a change so that XRna light significantly differs from ARna light, the change usually occurs under control of AS segment 212 in responding to the general impact effect or to the general CC control signal. Total XTcc light temporarily leaving NA segment 214, and therefore CC segment 194, consists of any AB-segment-provided XRab and XEab light passing through segment 214, any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through it, any XRna light directly reflected by it, and any XRsb light passing through it.
103061 Inasmuch as any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light leaving NA
segment 214 form XTab light leaving it via IF segment 196, XTcc light leaving CC segment 194 is also expressed as consisting of XTab light and any XRna light leaving NA segment 214. Any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRna light leaving segment 214 form XDcc light leaving CC segment 194. Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 pass through IS segment 192. If IS
component 182 normally reflects ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light. X light is formed with any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, ARis, XRna, and XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138.

103071 Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X occurring in the absence of ARna and XRna light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of NA layer 204, specifically the wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARna and XRna light, without changing assembly 202 or FA layer 206. NA layer 204 can thus strongly influence color A or/and color X.
103081 Either of the changed GAB modes, including any of the versions of the light outputting changed GAB mode, can generally be employed with either of the normal GAB modes, including any of the versions of the right outputting normal GAB mode, in an embodiment of CC component 184 except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode provided, however, that the operation of the changed GAB mode is compatible with the operation of normal GAB mode in that embodiment.
This compatibility requirement may effectively preclude employing certain versions of the light outputting changed GAB mode with certain versions of the light outputting normal GAB
mode.
103091 When two versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode differ only in that ARsb light is present in one of the versions and absent in the other, the difference is generally of a relatively minor nature. The same applies when the only difference between two versions of the light outputting changed GAB mode is that XRsb light is present in one of the versions and absent in the other. Subject to the preceding compatibility requirement, the major combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one of the normal GAB modes consist of employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light outputting changed GAB mode for a version in which (a) XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212 or/and (b) XRab or/and XEab light is provided directly by segment 212 with the light non-outputting normal GAB
mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a) ARfa or/and AEfa light provided by FA
layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARab or/and AEab light is provided directly by assembly 202 again except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
Configuration and General Operation of Electrode Assembly 103101 Electrode assembly 202 in 01 structure 200 consists of a principal core layer 222, principal near (first) electrode structure 224, and principal far (second) electrode structure 226 located generally opposite, and spaced apart from, near electrode structure 224. Core layer 222 lies between electrode structures 224 and 226.
"NE" and "FE" hereafter respectively mean near electrode and far electrode. FE
structure 226 is farther away from SF zone 112 than NE structure 224 so that structures 224 and 226 respectively meet auxiliary layers 204 and 206. Core layer 222 and structures 224 and 226 all usually extend parallel to one another and to auxiliary layers 204 and 206, zone 112, and interface 136. Each structure 224 or 226 contains a layer (not separately shown) for conducting electricity. Structures 224 and 226 control core layer 222 as further described below and typically process light, usually passively, which affects the operation of layer 222 and thus CC component 184.

103111 Light travels from NA layer 204 or. if it is absent, from interface 186 through NE structure 224 (including its electrode layer) to core layer 222 and vice versa. Accordingly, light leaves layer 222 along structure 224. In some embodiments of CC component 184, light travels from interface 186 through structure 224, layer 222, and FE structure 226 (similarly including its electrode layer) to FA layer 206 and vice versa so that light leaves layer 206 along structure 226.
103121 FE structure 226 operates as follows during the normal state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light leaves structure 226 along core layer 222. One or more of the following actions occur with structure 226 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting normal GAB mode: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 (if present) passes through structure 226, (ii) substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by layer 206 pass through structure 226, and (iii) structure 226 reflects light, termed ARfe light, which leaves it along core layer 222 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), NE structure 224, and core layer 222 and which thus excludes any ARfa or ARsb light. The total light (if any), termed ATfe light, normally leaving structure 226 consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 so as to pass through structure 226, any ARfe light directly reflected by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
103131 Core layer 222 operates as follows during the normal state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light normally leaves layer 222 along NE structure 224. One or more of the following actions occur with layer 222 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting normal GAB mode so as to implement it for layer 222: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FE structure 226 passes through layer 222, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light passing through structure 226 pass through layer 222, (iii) a substantial part of any ARfe light reflected by structure 226 passes through layer 222, and (iv) light, termed ADcl light and of wavelength for a normal reflected/emitted core color ADcl, is reflected or/and emitted by layer 222 so as to leave it along NE structure 224.
103141 ADel light, which excludes any ARfe, ARfa, or ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed ARcl light and of wavelength for a normal reflected core color ARcl, normally reflected by core layer 222 so as to leave it along NE structure 224 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS
component 182, NA layer 204, and structure 224 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcl light and of wavelength for a normal emitted core color AEcl, normally emitted by core layer 222 so as to leave it along structure 224.
Reflected ARcl light is typically present when ADcl light is present. The total light, termed ATcl light and of wavelength for a normal total core color ATcl, leaving layer 222 in the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of any ARcl and AEcl light provided directly by layer 222 and any ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light passing through it.
103151 Emitted AEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa light is present in it and vice versa. When ADfa light is absent, each of ADcl light and either ARcl or AEcl light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934 component, of each of A. ADic, ADcc, and ADab light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
103161 Substantial parts of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light normally leaving core layer 222 pass through NE structure 224. In addition, structure 224 may normally reflect light, termed ARne light, which leaves it along NA layer 204 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and layer 204 and which thus excludes any ARcl, ARfa, ARfe, or ARsb light. Total ATab light normally leaving structure 224, and therefore assembly 202, consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light passing through structure 224 and any ARne light directly reflected by it.
103171 Any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NE structure 224 form ADab light leaving assembly 202. Any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NA layer 204 form ADcc light leaving CC
component 184. Additionally, ARce light reflected by component 184 consists of any ARab, ARfa, and ARna light, ARab light being formed with any ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light. AEcc light emitted by component 184 consists of any AEab and AEfa light, AEab light being formed with any AEcl light.
103181 Changes in AB segment 212 during the changed state arise from electrical signals applied to electrode structures 224 and 226 in response (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect provided by IS segment 192 for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments. Referring again to Figs. 12b and 12c, item 232 is the ID segment of core layer 222 present in IDVC portion 138. Items 234 and 236 respectively are the ID
segments of structures 224 and 226 present in portion 138.
103191 ID FE segment 236 operates as follows during the changed state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode, largely no light leaves FE segment 236 along ID core segment 232.
One or more of the following actions occur with FE segment 236 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting changed GAB mode: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through ID
segment 216 of FA layer 206 (if present) passes through segment 236, (ii) substantial parts of any XRfa and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 pass through segment 236, and (iii) segment 236 reflects light, termed XRfe light, which leaves it along core segment 232 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192, segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if present), ID NE segment 234, and core segment 232 and which thus excludes any XRfa or XRsb light. The total light (if any), termed XTfe light, temporarily leaving FE segment 236 consists of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through segment 236, any XRfe light directly reflected by it, and any XRsb light passing through it. XRfe light can be the same as, or significantly different from, ARfe light depending on how the light processing in IDVC portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light processing in VC region 106 during the normal state.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 10320] Core segment 232 responds (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being met by temporarily operating as follows during the changed state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode, largely no light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234. One or more of the following actions occur in core segment 232 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting changed GAB mode so as to implement it for segment 232: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through FE segment 236 passes through core segment 232, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through FE segment 236 pass through core segment 232, (iii) a substantial part of any XRfe light reflected by FE segment 236 passes through core segment 232, and (iv) light, termed XDcl light and of wavelength for a temporary reflected/emitted core color XDcl, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234.
103211 XDcl light, which excludes any XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if any), termed XRcl light and of wavelength for a temporary reflected core color XRcl, temporarily reflected by core segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234 after striking print area 118, passing through IS segment 192, NA segment 214, and NE segment 234 and (b) light (if any), termed XEcl light and of wavelength for a temporary emitted core color XEcl, temporarily emitted by core segment 232 so as to leave it along NE segment 234. Reflected XRcl light is typically present when XDcl light is present The total light, termed XTcl light and of wavelength for a temporary total core color XTcl, leaving core segment 232 in the light outputting changed GAB mode consists of any XRcl and XEcl light provided directly by segment 232 and any XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing through it. XTcl light differs materially from ATcl light.
103221 Emitted XEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting changed GAB mode when emitted XEfa light is present in it and vice versa. XDcl light usually differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, ADcl, and ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. The same applies usually to XRcl and AEcl light if both are present and, of course, to XRcl or XEcl light if it is present but respective XEcl or XRcl light is absent. When XDfa light is absent, each of XDcl light and either XRcl or XEcl light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of X, XDic, XDcc, and XDab light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and constituted.
10323] Substantial parts of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light leaving core segment 232 during the changed state pass through NE segment 234. If NE structure 224 reflects ARne light during the normal state, segment 234 reflects light, termed XRne light, which leaves it along NA segment 214 during the changed state after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 and which thus excludes any XRcl, XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light. XRne light is usually largely ARne light. If XRne light significantly differs from ARne light, the difference usually arises due to segment 214 undergoing a change under control of AS segment 212 in responding to the general impact effect or to the general CC control signal.

WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934 Total XTab light temporarily leaving NE segment 234, and therefore AB segment 212, consists of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRne light reflected by it.
XTab light differs materially from ATab light.
103241 Any XRcl, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NE segment 234 form XDab light leaving AB
segment 212. Any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NA
segment 214 form XDcc light leaving CC segment '194. Also, XRcc light reflected by segment 194 consists of any XRab, XRfa, and XRna light, XRab light being formed with any XRcl, XRne, and XRfe light. XEcc light emitted by segment 194 consists of any XEab light and any XEfa light, XEab light being formed with any XEcl light 103251 Expanding on what was stated above in order to accommodate fight reflected by NE structure 224, when two versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode differ only in that ARne or/and ARsb light is present in one of the versions and absent in the other version, the difference is generally of a relatively minor nature.
The same applies when the only difference between two versions of the light outputting changed GAB mode is that XRne or/and XRsb light is present in one of the versions and absent in the other version. Subject to the above-mentioned compatibility requirement and particularizing to light provided by core layer 222, the major combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one of the normal GAB modes consist of employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light outputting changed GAB mode for a version in which (a) XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 passes through AB segment 212 or/and (b) XRcl or/and XEcl light provided by core segment 232 passes through NE segment 234 with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a) ARfa or/and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARcl or/and AEcl light provided by core layer 222 passes through NE structure 224 again except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
103261 The reliability and longevity of 01 structure 200 are generally enhanced when the pressure inside assembly 202, specifically inside core layer 222, is close to atmospheric pressure. More particularly, the average pressure across layer 222 of any fluid (liquid or/and gas) in layer 222 during operation of structure 200 is preferably at least 0.25 atm, more preferably at least 0.5 atm, even more preferably at least 0.75 atm, yet more preferably at least 0.9 atm, and is preferably no more than 2 atm, more preferably no more than 1.5 atm, even more preferably no more than 1.25 atm, yet more preferably no more than 1.1 atm.
Electrode Layers and their Characteristics and Compositions 103271 The electrode layers of NE structure 224 and FE structure 226 are respectively termed NE and FE
layers and can be embodied in various ways. Each NE or FE layer may be implemented with two or more electrode sublayers. In one embodiment, each electrode layer is a patterned layer laterally extending largely across the full extent of VC region 106. In another embodiment, one electrode layer, typically the NE layer, is a patterned layer extending largely across the full lateral extent of region 106 while the other electrode layer is a blanket layer (or sheet) extending largely across the full lateral extent of region 106.
103281 Each patterned electrode layer may consist of one electrode or multiple electrodes spaced laterally apart from one another. The space to the sides of each patterned electrode layer is typically largely occupied with insulating material but can be largely empty or largely occupied with gas such as air. If each patterned electrode layer consists of multiple electrodes, one or more layers of conductive material may lie over or/and under the electrodes for electrical contacting them.
103291 When each electrode layer is a patterned layer formed with multiple electrodes, the patterns can be the same such that the electrodes in each electrode layer lie respectively opposite the electrodes in the other electrode layer. The cellular structures described below for VC region 106 in regard to Figs. 38a, 38b, 43a, 431), 46a, 46b, 48a, 48b, 50a, 50b, and 53 present examples in which each electrode layer is a patterned layer consisting of multiple electrodes with the space to the sides of the electrodes largely occupied with insulating material and with the electrodes in each electrode layer lying respectively opposite the electrodes in the other electrode layer. Alternatively, the patterns in the electrode layers can differ materially so that the electrodes in the NE layer materially overlap the electrodes in the FE layer at selected sites across region 106.
103301 In a third embodiment of electrode structures 224 and 226, each electrode layer is a blanket layer laterally extending largely across the full extent of VC region 106. The conductivity of one of the blanket electrode layers, typically the NE layer, is usually so low that a voltage applied to a specified point in that blanket layer attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across the layer so as to effectively be received only in a relatively small area containing the voltage-application point of that electrode layer.
103311 Core layer 222 contains thickness locations, termed chief core thickness locations, lying between opposite portions of the electrode layers, e.g., thickness locations extending perpendicular to both electrode layers. Depending on how the electrode layers are configured, layer 222 may also have thickness locations, termed subsidiary core thickness locations, not lying between opposite portions of the electrode layers. A
subsidiary core thickness location occurs when an infinitely long straight line extending through that location generally parallel to its lateral surfaces, generally parallel to the lateral surfaces of the nearest chief core thickness location, and generally perpendicular to the electrode layers extends through only one of the electrode layers or through neither electrode layer. Let (a) V, represent the controllable voltage, termed the near (or first) controllable voltage, at any point in the NE layer, (b) Vt represent the controllable voltage, termed the far (or second) controllable voltage, at any point in the FE layer, and (c) V,f represent the control voltage difference V,, -Vt between controllable voltages V, and Vt at those two points in the electrode layers. With the foregoing in mind, 01 structure 200, including assembly 202, operates as follows.
[03321 Referring to Fig. 12a, near controllable voltage V,, is normally largely at the same near normal control value V,-,11 throughout the NE layer regardless of whether it consists of one electrode, patterned or WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 unpatterned (blanket), or multiple electrodes. Similarly, far controllable voltage Vt is normally largely at the same far normal control value Vpj throughout the FE layer regardless of whether it is formed with a single electrode, patterned or unpatterned, or multiple electrodes. Let Ve4 represent the normal value VnN - Vftj of control voltage V,f constituted as difference V, - Vt. Ignoring any dielectric or semiconductor material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer, the electrode layers normally apply (a) a voltage equal to normal control value Wm across essentially every chief thickness core location and (b) a voltage of the same sign as, but of lesser magnitude than, normal value VAN across any subsidiary thickness core location.
103331 The characteristics of core layer 222 and the core-layer voltage distribution resulting from normal control value V-,trt are chosen so that, during the normal state, total ATab light consists of any ADab, ADfa, and ARsb light. Again, ADab light again consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe light while ADfa light consists of any ARfa and AEfa light. NA layer 204 is sufficiently transmissive of ATab light that ATcc light formed with ATab light and any ARna light normally leaves CC component 184. Similarly, IS
component 182 is sufficiently transmissive of ATcc light that A light formed with ATcc light and any ARis light normally leaves VC region 106.
10334j VC region 106 often provides the principal general CC control signal in response to the general impact effect supplied by IS segment 192. Referring to Figs. 12b and 12c, the control signal consists of changing control voltage V1 for IDVC portion 138 to a changed control value \Imo materially different from normal control value Vnf14. Region 106 goes to the changed state. The control signal as formed with changed control value VpfC can be generated by various parts of region 106, e.g., by component 182, specifically segment 192, or by a portion, such as NA layer 204, of CC component '164. Voltage VI
remains substantially at normal value VnfN for the remainder of region 106.
(03351 The general CC control signal can alternatively originate outside VC
region 106. For instance, the control signal can be a general CC initiation signal conditionally supplied from an intelligent CC controller as described below for Figs. 64a and 64b. In a cellular embodiment of assembly 202 as described below for Figs.
43a and 43b, 46a and 46b, 48a and 48b, 50a and 50b, or 53, the control signal can consist of multiple cellular CC initiation signals supplied respectively to full CM cells, specifically to their electrode parts, as described below for Fig. 71 or 73.
[03361 The general CC control signal is applied between a voltage-application location in the NE layer and a voltage-application location in the FE layer. "VA" hereafter means voltage-application. At least one of the VA
locations is in ID segment 194 of CC component 184 and depends on where object 104 contacts SF zone 112.
Near controllable voltage Vr, at the VA location in the NE layer is then at a near (or first) CC control value Võc.
Far controllable voltage Vf at the VA location in the FE layer is at a far (or second) CC control value Vfc.
Depending on how the control signal is generated, CC values Vic and V10 may be respectively the same as, or respectively differ from, normal values Vrtl and WI as long as far CC value VIC differs materially from far normal value VfN if near CC value Va-; is the same as near normal value Val and vice versa. In any event. CC values Vnc. and Vfc are chosen so that changed value Vic differs materially from normal value VA.
103371 The VA locations in the electrode layers can be variously implemented depending on their configurations. If each electrode layer is a patterned layer, the VA location in the NE layer extends partly or fully across ID segment 234 of NE structure 224, and the VA location in the FE layer extends partly or fully across ID
segment 236 of FE structure 226. If one of the electrode layers, typically the NE layer, is a patterned layer while the other electrode layer is a blanket layer, the VA location in the patterned electrode layer extends partly or fully across its electrode segment 234 or 236, and the VA location in the other electrode layer extends partly or fully across the other electrode segment 236 or 234 and laterally beyond that other electrode segment 236 or 234, e.g., across the full lateral extent of VC region 106. If either patterned electrode layer consists of multiple electrodes, the VA location in that multi-electrode electrode layer may partly or fully encompass two or more of its electrodes.
103381 If each electrode layer is a blanket layer with the conductivity of one of the electrode layers, again typically the NE layer, being so low that a voltage applied to a specified point in that blanket electrode layer attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across it so as to effectively be received only in a relatively small area containing that layer's VA point, the small area in that blanket electrode layer constitutes its VA location and lies in electrode segment 234 or 236 where voltage V-, or V1 is effectively received at CC value Vra-; or Vfc. The VA
location in the other electrode layer usually extends partly or fully across its electrode segment 236 or 234 and laterally beyond its electrode segment 236 or 234, e.g., again across the full lateral extent of VC region 106.
103391 The common feature of the preceding ways of configuring the electrode layers is that the general CC control signal is applied between electrode segments 234 and 236. Ignoring any dielectric or semiconductor material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer, electrode segments 234 and 236 temporarily apply (a) a voltage equal to changed control value V,,g; across essentially every chief thickness core location in core segment 232 and (b) a voltage of the same sign as, but of lesser magnitude than, changed value Vac across any subsidiary thickness core location in segment 232. If there is no subsidiary thickness location in segment 232, the control signal is simply applied across segment 232, again ignoring any dielectric or semiconductor material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer.
103401 The characteristics of core layer 222 and the core-segment voltage distribution resulting from changed value \ink', are chosen so that core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal, and thus to the general impact effect from which the control signal is generated for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met, by undergoing internal change that enables XTab light leaving AB segment 212 to consist of any XDab, XDfa, and XRsb light. Again, XDab light consists of any XRci, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light while XDfa light consists of any XRfa and XEfa light. NA layer 204 is sufficiently transmissive of XTab light that XTcc light formed with XTab light and any XRna light WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934 temporarily leaves CC segment 194. Similarly, IS component 182 is sufficiently transmissive of XIcc light that X
light formed with XTcc light and any ARis light temporarily leaves IDVC
portion 138.
10:341 ) NA layer 204 can include a programmable reflection-adjusting layer (not separately shown), typically separated from assembly 202 by insulating material, for being electrically programmed subsequent to manufacture of 01 structure 200 for adjusting colors A and X. "RA" hereafter means reflection-adjusting. The RA layer is preferably clear transparent prior to programming. The programming causes the RA layer to become tinted transparent or more tinted transparent if it originally was tinted transparent. ARna light is thereby adjusted. XRna light is also adjusted, typically in a way corresponding to the ARna adjustment. As a result, colors A and X are adjusted respectively from an initial principal color A, and an initial changed color X, prior to programming to a final principal color A/ and a final changed color X1 subsequent to programming.
[03421 The programming of the RA layer can be variously done, In one programming technique, a temporary blanket conductive programming layer is deployed on SF zone 112 prior to programming. In another programming technique, 01 structure 200 includes a permanent blanket conductive programming layer, typically constituted with part of NA layer 204, lying between zone 112 and the RA
layer. In both techniques, a programming voltage is applied between the programming layer and NE structure 224 sufficiently long to cause the RA layer to change to a desired tinted transparency. The programming layer, if a temporary one, is usually removed from zone 112. The tinting adjustment can be caused by introduction of RA ions into the RA layer. If the NE layer is patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE
layer usually undergoes the same tinting adjustment as the RA material between the programming layer and the NE
layer.
(0343j Alternatively, core layer 222 can include a programmable RA layer lying along NE structure 224 and having the preceding transparency characteristics. The core RA layer is programmed to a desired tinted transparency by applying a programming voltage between the NE and FE layers for a suitable time period.
Introduction of RA ions into the core RA layer can cause the tinting adjustment. If the NE or FE layer is patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE or FE layer usually undergoes the same tinting adjustment as the RA material between the NE and FE layers. The magnitude of the programming voltage is usually much greater than the magnitudes of control values VIIN and VrIfc.
Regardless of whether the RA layer is located in NA layer 204 or structure 224, the programming voltage can be a selected one of plural different programming values for causing final principal color Alto be a corresponding one of like plural different specific final principal colors and for causing final changed color X/ to be a corresponding one of like plural different specific final changed colors.
103441 The NE layer transmits at least 40% of incident light across at least part of the visible spectrum and consists of conductive material or/and resistive material whose resistivity is, for example, 10 - 100 ohm-cm at 300 K. This conductive or/and resistive material is termed transparent conductive material since the resistivity of the resistive material, when present, is close to the upper limit,10 ohm-cm at 300 K, of the resistivity for conductive material. "TCM" hereafter means transparent conductive material.
The FE layer is similarly formed with TOM if visible light is intended to pass fully through one or more thickness locations of core layer 222 at certain times.
103451 In situations where a thin layer of a TOM transmits at least 40% of incident light across part, but not all, of the visible spectrum, the selection of colors of light to be transmitted by the thin layer is limited to the part of the visible spectrum across which the layer transmits at least 40% of incident light. The part of the visible spectrum across which a thin layer of a TOM transmits at least 40% of incident light may be single portion continuous in wavelength or a plurality of portions separated by portions in which the thin layer transmits less than 40% of incident light. The transmissivity of incident visible light of a thin layer of the TOM across part, preferably all, of the visible spectrum is usually at least 50%, preferably at least 60%, more preferably at least 80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet further preferably at least 95%.
103461 The thicknesses of a TOM layer meeting the preceding transmissivity criteria is typically 0.1 - 0.2 pm but can be more or less. The layer thickness can generally be controlled.
However, the layer thickness is sometimes determined by the characteristics of the TOM. For instance, the thickness of graphene when used as the TOM is largely the diameter of a carbon atom because graphene consists of a single layer of hexagonally arranged carbon atoms. The transmissivity normally increases with increasing resistivity and vice versa. In particular, decreasing the TOM layer thickness (when controllable) typically causes the transmissivity and resistivity of the TOM layer to increase and vice versa.
103471 The transmissivity and resistivity of a TOM layer often depend on how it is fabricated. All of the materials identified below as TOM candidates meet the preceding TOM
transmissivity and resistivity criteria for at least one set of TOM manufacturing conditions. If the transmissivity is too low, the transmissivity can generally be increased at the cost of increasing the resistivity by appropriately adjusting the manufacturing conditions or/and reducing the TOM layer thickness (when controllable). If the resistivity is too high, the resistivity can generally be reduced at the cost of reducing the transmissivity by appropriately adjusting the manufacturing conditions or/and increasing the TOM layer thickness (when controllable).
103481 Many TOM candidates are transparent conductive oxides generally classified as (i) n-type meaning that majority conduction is by electrons or (ii) p-type meaning that majority conduction is by holes. TOO
hereafter means transparent conductive oxide. N-type TCOs are generally much more conductive than p-type TOOs. In particular, the resistivites of n-type TCOs are often several factors of 10 below 1 ohm-cm at 300 K
whereas the resistivifies of p-type TCOs are commonly 1 - 10 ohm-cm at 300 K.
103491 TOOs include undoped (essentially pure) metallic oxides and doped metallic oxides. In using a dopant metal to convert an undoped TOO containing one or more primary metals into a doped TOO, a dopant metal atom may replace a primary metal atom. Alternatively or additionally, a dopant metal atom may be added to the undoped TOO. The molar amount of dopant metal in a doped TCO is usually considerably less than the molar amount of primary metal in the TOO. If the molar amount of "dopant"
metal approaches the molar amount of primary metal, the TOO is often described below as a mixture of oxides of the constituent metals. In some situations, a TOM candidate containing multiple metals is identified below both as a doped TOO and as a mixture of oxides of the metals.
103501 Stoichiornetric chemical names and/or stoichiometric chemical formulas are generally used below to identify TCM candidates. However, many TOM candidates, especially undoped TC0s, are insulators or semiconductors in their pure stoichiometric formulations. Conductivity sufficiently high for those materials to be Tarts arises from defects in the materials or/and TOM formulations that are somewhat non-stoichiometric.
N-type (electron) conductivity sufficiently high to enable an undoped TOO to be an n-type TOM commonly arises when the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric oxygen amount (oxygen vacancy) or, equivalently, the molar amount of metal in the TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric metal amount. Similarly, p-type (hole) conductivity sufficiently high to enable an undoped TOO to be a p-type TOM
commonly arises when the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric oxygen amount (oxygen excess) or; equivalently, the molar amount of metal in the TOO
is somewhat below the stoichiometric metal amount.
103511 In light of the preceding chemical considerations, identifications of TOM candidates by their stoichiometric chemical names and/or stoichiometric chemical formulas here implicitly include formulations that are somewhat non-stoichiometric. More particularly, identification of an undoped n-type TOO by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric amount. The same applies to a TOO in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric oxygen amount and in which the TOO includes dopant such that the TOO still conducts n-type.
Identification of a p-type TOO, doped or undoped, by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula similarly includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount.
103521 Situations arise in which the molar amount of oxygen in a TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric amount and in which the TOO includes dopant at a sufficiently high content that the TOO
conducts p-type instead of n-type. Identification of such a p-type doped TOO
by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula, includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric amount. Situations can also arise in which the molar amount of oxygen in a TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount and in which the TOO includes dopant at a sufficiently high content that the TOO conducts n-type instead of p-type.
Identification of such an n-type doped TOO by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula includes formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 [0353] The following conventions are employed in presenting TOM candidates.
Alternative chemical names for some TOM candidates are presented in brackets after their UPAC
names, The name of a TOM
candidate consisting essentially of a mixture of two or more compounds is presented as the names of the compounds with a dash separating the names of each pair of constituent compounds. The name of a TOM
candidate containing dopant is presented as the name of the undoped compound followed by a colon and the name of the dopant. When the dopant consists of two or more different materials, a dash separates each pair of dopants. Many TOM candidates are placed in sets having certain characteristics in common. In some situations, a TOM candidate has the characteristics for multiple TOM sets. The TOM candidate then generally appears in each appropriate TOM set.
10354 j The fomiula for a TOM candidate consisting of an indefinite number of repeating units is generally given as the repeating unit followed by the subscript "n", e.g., On for a carbon TOM. When a TOM candidate contains two or more constituents each formed with an indefinite number of repeating units, each constituents portion of the formula is generally given as that constituents repeating unit followed by a subscript consisting of "n" and a sequentially increasing number beginning with "1", e.g. Cn1-(O6H40242 for graphene-poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene).
10355 ) Preferred TOM candidates are graphene-containing materials because they generally provide high transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high conductivity, high shock resistance, and high mechanical strength. In addition to graphene Or, itself, graphene-containing TOM
candidates include bilayer graphene O, few-layer graphene C, graphene foam CO3 graphene-graphite C:,1-O02, graphene-carbon nanotubes Cõi-C2, few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes C01-C,2, graphene-gold On-Au, few-layer graphene-gold CreAu, few-layer graphene-iron trichloride graphene-diindiurn trioxide [graphene-indium oxide] On-41203, graphene-poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene) Oni-(C6H40242, graphene-silver nanowires Or!-A9, and dopant-containing materials boron-doped graphene C,,:B (p-type), gold trichloride-doped graphene C:AuCt?., gold-doped graphene On:Au, gold-doped few-layer graphene On:Au, graphene-doped silicon dioxide Si02:On, nitric acid-doped graphene On:HNO3 (Hype), nitrogen-doped graphene On:N (n-type), tetracyanoquinodimethane-doped graphene On:(NO)2CO6H4O(ON)2 (p-type), graphene-doped carbon nanotubes Cni:Cr,2, and graphene-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate) (Cd-1402S)ni -(C8H80342:Cn.
10356 j Highly desirable TOM candidates are carbon-nanotube-containing materials because they generally provide high transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high conductivity, high shock resistance, and high mechanical strength. In addition to carbon nanotubes On itself, carbon-nanotube-containing TOM candidates include carbon nanotubes-gold C-Au and nitric acid-thionyl chloride-doped carbon nanotubes C,:HNO3-S0013 (p-type) plus graphene-carbon nanotubes, few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes, and graphene-doped carbon nanotubes also in the graphene-containing TOM candidates.

103571 Certain organic materials, including materials formed with both organic and non-organic constituents, can serve as the TOM. Although organic TOM candidates generally have considerably higher resistivities than graphene and carbon nanotubes, some transparent organic materials provide relatively high shock resistance and relatively high mechanical strength. Organic TOM
candidates of this type include poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) (O6H402S), termed PEDOT, poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate) (C61-1402S)ra-(C31-1E;03S),,2 termed PEDOT-PSS, and methanol-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate) (C6H402S),-0-(C81-1803S)2:CF130H, i.e., methanol-doped PEDOT-PSS, plus graphene-poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene), graphene-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate), and tetracyanoquinodimethane-doped graphene also in the graphene-containing TOM
candidates. Each organic TOM candidate is a polymer or a polymer-containing material.
103581 The preceding graphene-containing, carbon-nanotube-containing, and organic TOM candidates constitute sets of a larger set of carbon-containing TOM candidates. Subject to excluding graphene-diindium trioxide, nitric acid-thionyl chloride-doped carbon nanotubes, graphene-doped silicon dioxide, and nitric acid-doped graphene because they all contain oxides, the set of carbon-containing TOM candidates are part of an even larger set of transparent non-oxide TOM candidates that includes a set of halide-containing TOM
candidates, a set of metal sulfide-containing TOM candidates, a set of metal nitride-containing TOM candidates, and a set of metal nanowire-containing TOM candidates. In addition to few-layer graphene-iron trichloride and gold trichloride-doped graphene also in the carbon-containing TOM candidates, halide-containing non-oxide TOM candidates include p-type copper-containing halides barium copper selenium fluoride BaCuSeF, barium copper tellurium fluoride BaCuTeF, and copper iodide Cul.
103591 Metal sulfide-containing non-oxide TOM candidates include barium dicopper disulfide BaCu2S2 (p-type), copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS2 (p-type), and dopant-containing materials aluminum-doped zinc sulfide ZnS:Al and zinc-doped copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS2:Zn (p-type).
Metal nitride-containing non-oxide TOM candidates include gallium nitride GaN and titanium nitride TiN. Metal nanowire-containing non-oxide TOM
candidates include copper nanowires Cu, gold nanowires Au, and silver nanowires Ag plus graphene-silver nanowires also in the graphene-containing TOM candidates.
103601 Undoped n-type TCO candidates for the TOM include cadmium oxide CdO, cadmium oxide-diindium trioxide [cadmium-indium oxide] CdO-1n203, cadmium oxide-diindium trioxide-tin dioxide [cadmium-indium-tin oxide] CdO-1n203-SnO2 [Cd-In-Sn-0], cadmium oxide-tin dioxide [cadmium-tin oxide] CdO-5n02 [Od-Sn-0], cadmium tin trioxide CdSn03, dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide [cobalt-nickel oxide] Co203-NiO, digallium trioxide [gallium oxide] Ga203, digallium trioxide-tin dioxide [gallium-tin oxide] Ga203-Sn02, diindium trioxide [indium oxide] In203, diindium trioxide-digallium trioxide [indium gallium oxide] 1n203-Ga203, diindium trioxide-tin dioxide [indium-tin oxide] 1n703-Sn02, ditantalum oxide Ta20, dizinc diindium pentoxide Zn2In205, dodecacalcium decaluminum tetrasilicon pentatricontoxide Ca12AhoSi4035, digallium trioxide-diindium trioxide-tin dioxide (gallium-indium-tin oxide] Ga203-1n203-SnO2 [Ga-ln-Sn-01, digallium irioxide-diindium trioxide-zinc oxide [gallium-indium-zinc oxide] Ga203-1n203-ZnO [Ga-ln-Zn-O], germanium dioxide-zinc oxide-diindium trioxide [germanium-zinc-indium oxide] Ge02-ZnO-In203 [Ge-Zn-ln-O], indium gallium trioxide InGa03, iridium dioxide Ir02, lead dioxide Pb02, magnesium indium gallium tetroxide MgInGa04, ruthenium dioxide Ru02, strontium germanium trioxide SrGe03, tetrazinc diindium heptoxide ZNIn207, tetrindium tritin dodecaoxide In4Sn3012, tin dioxide Sn02, tricadmium tellurium hexoxide Cd3Te06, trizinc diindium hexoxide Zn3In206, zinc indium aluminum tetroxide ZnInA104, zinc indium gallium tetroxide ZnInGa04, zinc oxide ZnO, zinc oxide-diindium trioxide [zinc-indium oxide] ZnO-In203 [Zn-In-0], zinc oxide-indium gallium trioxide ZnO-InGa03, zinc oxide-diindium trioxide-tin dioxide [zinc-indium-tin oxide] ZnO-1n203-SnO2 [Zn-ln-Sn-O], zinc oxide-magnesium oxide [zinc-magnesium oxide] ZnO-MgO [Zn-Mg-O], and zinc tin trioxide ZnSn03. Undoped n-type TOO TOM
candidates further include spinel-structured materials cadmium digallium tetroxide CdGa204, cadmium diindium tetroxide CdIn204, dicadmium tin tetroxide Cd2Sn04, dizinc tin tetroxide Zn2Sn04, magnesium diindium tetroxide MgIn204, and zinc digallium tetroxide ZnGa204.
10361] A first set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine, cobalt, copper, fluorine, gallium, germanium, hafnium, hydrogen, indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, niobium, nitrogen, phosphorus, scandium, silicon, silver, tantalum, terbium, tin, titanium, tungsten, vanadium, yttrium, and zirconium. A second set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements. Specific n-type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include aluminum-boron, aluminum-fluorine, aluminum-nitrogen, boron-fluorine, gallium-aluminum, indium-aluminum, indium-fluorine, scandium-aluminum, saver-nitrogen, titanium-aluminum, tungsten-hydrogen, tungsten-indium, tungsten-manganese, yttrium-aluminum, and zirconium-aluminum.
103621 A third set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of tin dioxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, antimony, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine, cobalt, copper, fluorine, gallium, indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, niobium, silver, tantalum, tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of the tin dioxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants. A fourth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of tin dioxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and hafnium.
Specific n-type dopant combinations for tin dioxide include hafnium-antimony and indium-gallium.
103631 A fifth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including fluorine, gallium, germanium, hafnium, iodine, magnesium, molybdenum, niobium, tantalum, tin, titanium, tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of the indium oxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants.
A sixth set of doped n-type TCO TOM candidates consists of diindium trioxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and cadmium. Specific n-type dopant combinations for diindium trioxide include cadmium-tin, magnesium-tin, and zinc-tin.

103641 A seventh set of doped n-type TCO TCM candidates consists of cadmium oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, chromium, copper, fluorine, gadolinium, gallium, germanium, hydrogen, indium, iron, molybdenum, samarium, scandium, tin, titanium, yttrium, and zinc. Most of the cadmium oxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants. An eighth set of doped n-type TOO TOM
candidates consists of indium gallium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including germanium and tin. A
ninth set of doped n-type TCO TOM
candidates consists of barium tin trioxide BaSnO3 singly doped with certain elements including antimony and lanthanum. A tenth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of strontium tin trioxide SrTiO3 singly doped with certain elements including antimony, lanthanum, and niobium. An eleventh set of doped n-type TOO
TOM candidates consists of titanium dioxide TiO2 singly doped with certain elements including cobalt, niobium, and tantalum.
[03651 A twelfth set of doped n-type TCO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide-diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, gallium, germanium, and tin. A
thirteenth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide-magnesium oxide singly doped with certain elements including aluminum, gallium, indium, and nitrogen. Further doped n-type TOO TOM
candidates include antimony-doped strontium tin trioxide SrSn03:Sb, bismuth-doped lead dioxide Pb02:Bi, niobium-doped calcium titanium trioxide CaTiO3:Nb, tin-doped iron copper dioxide FeCu02:Sn, yttrium-doped cadmium diantimony hexoxide CdSb206:Y, gadolinium-cerium-doped cadmium oxide OdO:Gd-Oe, neodymium-niobium-doped strontium titanium trioxide SrTiO3:Nd-Nb, and hydrogen-doped ultraviolet-irradiated dodecacalcium heptaluminum triticontoxide Ca12A17033:H-UV [12Ca0.7A1203:H-UV].
103661 Undoped p-type TOO candidates for the TOM include disilver oxide Ag2O, iridium dioxide, lanthanum copper selenium oxide LaCuSe0, nickel oxide NiO, ruthenium dioxide, silver oxide AgO, tristrontium discandium dicopper disulfur pentoxide [dicopper disulfide-tristrontiurn discandium pentoxide] Sr3Sc2Ou2S206 [Cu2S2-Sr3Sc206], dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide, digallium trioxide-tin dioxide, zinc oxide-beryllium oxide Zn0-Be0, and zinc oxide-magnesium oxide, some of which are undoped n-type TOO TOM
candidates.
103671 Undoped p-type TOO TOM candidates include certain copper-containing and silver-containing delafossite-structured materials having the general formula MaMb03 where the valence of metal Ma is +1 and the valence of metal Mb is +3, Ma appearing after Mb when Ma is more electronegative than Mb. The undoped copper-containing delafossite-structured materials include chromium copper dioxide OrCu02, cobalt copper dioxide CoOu02, copper aluminum dioxide OuA102, copper boron dioxide CuB02, copper gallium dioxide CuGa02, copper indium dioxide Culn02, iron copper dioxide FeCu02, scandium copper dioxide ScCu02, and yttrium copper dioxide YOu02. The undoped silver-containing delafassite-structured materials include cobalt silver dioxide CoAg02, scandium silver dioxide ScAg02, silver aluminum dioxide AgA102, and silver gallium dioxide AgGa02.

103681 Other undoped p-type TOO TOM candidates include certain copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials having the general formula McOu202 where the valence of metal Mc is +2. The undoped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials include barium dicopper dioxide BaCu202, calcium dicopper dioxide CaCu202, magnesium dicopper dioxide MgCu202, and strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu202. Spinel-structured materials dicobalt nickel tetroxide Co2Ni04, dicobalt zinc tetroxide Co2D04., diiridium zinc tetroxide Ir2Zn04, and dirhenium zinc tetroxide Rh2ZnO4 are undoped p-type TOO TCM
candidates, 103691 A first set of doped p-type TOO TCM candidates consists of zinc oxide singly doped with certain elements including antimony, arsenic, bismuth, carbon, cobalt, copper, indium, lithium, manganese, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, sodium, and silver. A second set of doped p-type TOO
TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and aluminum, boron, copper, gallium, tantalum, and zirconium. Specific p-type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include aluminum-arsenic, copper-aluminum, and nitrogen-containing dopant combinations aluminum-nitrogen, boron-nitrogen, gallium-nitrogen, indium-nitrogen, lithium-nitrogen, silver-nitrogen, tantalum-nitrogen, and zirconium-nitrogen.
103701 A third set of doped p-type TOO TOM candidates consists of tin dioxide singly doped with certain elements including antimony, cobalt, gallium, indium, lithium, and zinc. A
fourth set of doped p-type TOO TOM
candidates consists of diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements including silver and zinc. A fifth set of doped p-type TOO TOM candidates consists of nickel oxide singly doped with certain elements including copper and lithium.
10371] A sixth set of doped p-type TCO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide-magnesium oxide singly doped with certain elements including nitrogen and potassium. Doped p-type TOO
TOM candidates additionally include aluminum-nitrogen-doped zinc oxide-magnesium oxide ZnO-Mg0:Al-N, indium-doped molybdenum trioxide Mo0:eln, indium-gallium-doped tin dioxide Sn02:In-Ga, magnesium-doped lanthanum copper selenium oxide LaCuSe0:Mg, magnesium-nitrogen-doped dichromium trioxide [magnesium-nitrogen-doped chromium oxide] Cr203:Mg-N, silver-doped dicopper oxide Cu20:Ag, and tin-doped diantimony tetroxide Sb204:Sn. Some of the doped p-type TOO TOM candidates are doped n-type TOO TOM candidates.
103721 Doped p-type TOO TOM candidates further include certain copper-containing delafossite-structured materials having the general formula CuMb02:Md where the valence of metal Mb is +3, Cu appearing after Mb when Cu is more electronegative than Mb, and Md is a dopant, usually a metal.
Doped copper-containing delafossite-structured materials include calcium-doped copper indium dioxide 0u1n02:Ca, calcium-doped yttrium copper dioxide YOu02:Ca, iron-doped copper gallium dioxide CuGa02:Fe, magnesium-doped chromium copper dioxide CrCu02:Mg, magnesium-doped copper aluminum dioxide CuA102:Mg, magnesium-doped iron copper dioxide FeCu02:Mg, magnesium-doped scandium copper dioxide ScCu02:Mg, oxygen-doped scandium copper dioxide ScCu02:0, and tin-antimony-doped nickel copper dioxide NiCu02:Sn-Sb.
Other doped p-type TOO

TOM candidates include certain copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials McCu202 where the valence of metal Mc is +2. Doped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials include barium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu?02:Ba, calcium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu202:Ca, and potassium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu202:K.
Reflection-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly 103731 CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 can be embodied in various ways. Four general embodiments of component 184 are based on changes in light reflection including light scattering. These four embodiments are termed the mid-reflection, mixed-reflection RT, mixed-reflection RN, and deep-reflection embodiments. None of these embodiments usually employs significant light emission.
103741 The following preliminary specifications apply to the four embodiments. Substructure-reflected ARsb or XRsb light is absent. IS segment 192 reflects ARis light during the changed state if IS component 182 reflects ARis light during the normal state. XRna and XRne light respectively reflected by NA segment 214 and NE segment 234 during the changed state are respectively the same as ARna and ARne light respectively reflected by NA layer 204 and NE structure 224 during the normal state. For an embodiment variation in which XRna light differs significantly from ARna light and/or XRne light differs significantly from ARne light, XRna and/or XRne light are to be respectively substituted for ARna and/or ARne light in the following material describing the changed-state operation. Some reflected light invariably leaves VC region 106 during the normal state and IDVC portion 138 during the changed state.
103751 The mid-reflection embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary ARne/X.RcIARfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARGVARfe light reflection and XRcVXRfe light reflection. FA layer 206, if present, is usually not involved in color changing in the mid-reflection embodiment. There is largely no ARfa or XRfa light, and thus largely no total ATfa or XTfa light, here.
103761 During the normal state, the mid-reflection embodiment operates as follows. Core layer 222 normally reflects ARcl light or/and FE structure 226 normally reflects ARfe light that passes through layer 222.
ARcl or ARfe light, usually ARcl light, is a majority component of A light.
Total ATcl light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of normally reflected ARcl light and any normally reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222, typically mostly ARcl light, and is a majority component of A light. Total ATab light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of ARab light formed with ARcl light passing through NE
structure 224, any ARne light reflected by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly ARcl light, and is also a majority component of A light.
103771 Total ATcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of ARcl light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and ARfe light passing through it, again typically mostly ARcl light Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with ARcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
103781 During the changed state, core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by temporarily reflecting XRcl light or/and allowing XRfe light temporarily reflected by FE segment 236 to pass through core segment 232. XRcl or XRfe light, usually XRcl light, is a majority component of X light. Total XTcl light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of temporarily reflected XRcl light and any temporarily reflected XRfe light passing through segment 232, typically mostly XRcl light, and is a majority component of X light.
Total XTab light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of XRab light formed with XRcl light passing through NE
segment 234, any ARne light reflected by it, and any XRfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly XRcl light, and is also a majority component of X light.
[0379] Total XTcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of XRcl light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and XRfe light passing through it, again typically mostly XRcl light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XRcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, and XRfe light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
10380) Assembly 202 in the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 may be embodied with one or more of the following light-processing arrangements: a dipolar suspension arrangement, an electrochromic arrangement, an electrofluidic arrangement, an electrophoretic arrangement (including an electroosmotic arrangement), an electrowetting arrangement, and a photonic crystal arrangement.
1038i1 One implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment employs translation (movement) or/and rotation of a multiplicity (or set) of particles dispersed, usually laterally uniformly, in a supporting medium in core layer 222 for changing the reflection characteristics of core segment 232. The particles, often titanium dioxide, are normally distributed or/and oriented in the medium so as to cause layer 222 to normally reflect ARcl light such that total ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222 is at least a majority component of A light. Segment 232 contains a submultiplicity (or subset) of the particles. Responsive to the CC control signal, the particles in segment 232 translate or/and rotate for enabling it to temporarily reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed with the XRcl light and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through segment 232 is at least a majority component of X light ARcl and XRcl light are usually respective majority components of A and X light.
103821 In one version of the particle translation or/and rotation implementation, the particles are charged particles of largely one color while the supporting medium is a fluid of largely another color. The fluid is typically of a color ARclm quite close to normal reflected core color ARcl and having a majority component of wavelength suitable for color A. The fluid reflects ARclm light while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other light. The particles are largely of a color XRcim quite close to temporary reflected core color XRcl and having a majority component of wavelength suitable for color X. The particles thereby reflect XRclm light. Color XRclm, usually lighter than color ARcim here, differs materially from color ARcIrn.
103831 Setting control voltage VI at normal value Vral laterally along core layer 222 causes the particles to be averagely, i.e., on the average, remote from (materially spaced apart from) NE structure 224. In particular, the particles are normally dispersed throughout the fluid or situated adjacent to (close to or adjoining) FE
structure 226. Because the XRclm-colored particles are normally averagely remote from NE structure 224 and because the ARclm-colored fluid absorbs or/and transmits light other than ARclm light, the large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light, formed with ARcl light and any ARfe light, leaving layer 222 is provided by reflection of ARcim light off the fluid. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is largely ARcim light.
103841 The particle charging and the V,K; polarity are chosen such that the particles in core segment 232 translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 when voltage V,ff along core segment 232 goes to changed value Vrc. The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light, formed with XRcl light and any XRfe light, leaving segment 232 is now provided by reflection of XRclm light off the particles in segment 232.
XTcl light leaving segment 232 is largely XRclm light. Since color XRclm differs materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl differs materially from normal reflected core color ARcl. The same result is achieved by reversing both the particle charging and the VrifC polarity.
103851 The fluid can alternatively be of color XRclm. If so, the fluid reflects XRclm light and absorbs or/and transmits, preferably absorbs, other light. The particles are of color ARclm usually now lighter than color XRclm, and either the particle charging or the Vfc polarity is reversed from that just described. The ARclm-colored particles are normally adjacent to NE structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARcim light off the particles. ATcl light leaving core layer 222 is again largely ARcim light.
103861 Changing voltage VI in core segment 232 to value Vnic causes the particles in segment 232 to translate materially away from NE segment 234 so as to be dispersed throughout the segment of the fluid in core segment 232 or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. Because the particles in core segment 232 are now averagely remote from NE segment 234 and because the XRclm-colored fluid absorbs non-XRclm light, the large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is provided by reflection of XRclm light off the fluid in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is again largely XRclm light. With color XRclm differing materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl again differs materially from normal reflected core color ARcl. The same result is achieved by reversing both the particle charging and the Vfc polarity.
103871 The particles in another version of the particle translation or/and rotation implementation consist of two groups of particles of different colors. The supporting medium is a transparent fluid, typically a liquid. The particles in one group are typically largely of color ARclm while the particles in the other group are largely of color XRclm. The particles have characteristics which enable the ARcitn-colored particles to translate oppositely to the XRclm-colored particles in the presence of an electric field. The particles can be charged so that the XRclm-colored particles are charged oppositely to the ARcIrri-colored particles. The charge on each XRclm-colored particle can be of the same magnitude as, or a different magnitude than, the charge on each ARclm-colored particle.
103881 The VoN polarity and particle characteristics, e.g., particle charging, are chosen such that setting voltage VI at normal value Vr.rig laterally along core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the XRclm-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is normally provided by reflection of ARcIrn light off the ARclm-colored particles. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is largely ARclm light.
103891 Changing voltage V,,, in core segment 232 to value Vnfc at a polarity opposite value VnfN causes the XRclm-colored particles in segment 232 to translate so as to be adjacent to NE
segment 234 while the ARcIrn-colored particles in core segment 232 translate so as to be averagely remote from segment 234. The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is now provided by reflection of XRclm light off the XRclm-colored particles in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is largely XRclm light. Since color XRclm differs materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl differs materially from normal reflected core color ARcl.
103901 The ARcim light reflected by the ARclm-colored particles can be specularly reflected, scattered, or a combination of specularly reflected and scattered. The same applies to the XRclm light reflected by the XRcim-colored particles. The radiosity of the reflected ARclm or XRclm light can be very low such that color ARclm or XRclm is quite dark, sometimes nearly black. If so, the ARclm-colored or XRclm-colored particles absorb the large majority of incident light.
10391j Different selections of particle coloring can be made in combination with aitering other particle characteristics. In one example, the particles in one group are of color ARclm while the particles in the other group are of a color Fl Rc significantly different from colors ARcl and XRcl.
The Fl Rc-colored particles reflect Fl Rc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light. The particles have characteristics enabling the ARclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in the presence of an electric field that changes polarity while the Fl Rc-colored particles translate, to the extent possible, toward or away from structure 224 depending on the field polarity. The Fl Rc particles can be charged while the ARclm-colored particles are largely uncharged but have physical properties attracting them to structure 224.
103921 The Voil polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage Vni at normal value V.1 laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARcim-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the FiRc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARcIrn light off the ARcIrn-colored particles. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.

103931 The Vrc polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage \int at normal value VIN laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the Fl Rc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARclm-colored particles. ATel light leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
[0394] In a complementary example, the particles in one group are of color XRclm while the particles in the other group are of a color GlRe significantly different from colors ARcl and XRcl. The G1 Re-colored particles reflect GiRc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light.
The particles have characteristics enabling the XRclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in the presence of an electric field that changes polarity while the GlRe-colored particles translate, to the extent possible, toward or away from structure 224 depending on the field polarity. The GiRc-colored particles can be charged while the XRclm-colored particles are largely uncharged but have physical properties attracting them to structure 224.
103951 The \Inns! polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that setting voltage Vrif at normal value VrIfF4 laterally across core layer 222 causes both the XRclm-colored and Cl Rc-colored particles to be adjacent to NE structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is then normally provided by reflection of GlRe and XRclm light off both the G1Rc-colored and XRclm-colored particles. ATel light leaving layer 222 consists of a G1Rc and XRclm light The ATcl combination of G1Rc and XRclm light is chosen to differ materially from XRcl light and, in particular, to have a majority component suitable for color A.
103961 Changing voltage Vt in core segment 232 to value \iinfc of opposite polarity to value Vriftl causes the G1Rc-colored particles to translate materially away from NE segment 234 so as to be averagely remote from segment 234 while the XRclm-colored particles remain adjacent to segment 234.
The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is provided by reflection of XRclm light off the XRclm-colored particles in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is again largely XRclm light.
Since the ARcl light combination of G1Rc and XRclm light differs materially from XRcl light, temporary core color XRcl differs materially from normal core color ARcl.
103971 In a further version of the particle translation or/and rotation implementation, the surface of each particle consists of two portions of different colors. The particles are optically and electrically anisotropic. The optical anisotropicity is achieved by arranging for the outer surface of each particle to consist of one SF portion of color ARclm and another SF portion of color XRclm. The two SF portions are usually of approximately the same area. The particles can be generally spherical with the two SF portions of each particle being hemispherical surfaces. The electrical anisotropicity is achieved by providing the two SF portions of each particle with different zeta potentials. Each particle is usually a dipole with one SF portion negatively charged and the other positively charged. The supporting medium is a solid transparent sheet having cavities in which the particles are respectively located. Each cavity is slightly larger than its particle. The part of each cavity outside its particle is filled with transparent dielectric fluid for enabling each particle to rotate freely in its cavity.
103981 Voltage values VIN and V0 are chosen so that one is positive and the other is negative. If value VniN is positive, the ARclm-colored SF portions are negatively charged while the XRclm-colored SF portions are positively charged. The opposite surface-portion charging is used if value V,,,r4 is positive. Either way, setting voltage VI at normal value linfN causes the particles to rotate so that their ARclm-colored SF portions face NE
structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off the ARcIrn-colored SF portions of the particles. ATcl light leaving core layer 222 is largely ARcirn light.
103991 Applying the general CC control signal to core segment 232 so that voltage \int is at changed value Voc across segment 232 causes the particles in it to rotate so that their XRcl-colored SF portions face NE
segment 234. The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is now provided by reflection of XRclm light off the XRcl-colored SF portions of the particles in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is largely XRclm light. With color XRclm differing materially from color ARcim, temporary core color XRcl differs materially from normal core color ARcl.
10400) During the changed state in all three versions of the particle translation or/and rotation implementation, the particles in the remainder of core layer 222 largely maintain the particle orientations or/and average locations existent during the normal state. The large majority of both reflected light and total light leaving the remainder of layer 222 consists of reflected ARclm light or, in the last-mentioned example of the version using two groups of particles of different colors, a reflected combination of XRclm and G1Rc light identical to that normally present and thereby forming ARcl light.
10401j Another implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC
component 184 entails changing the absorption characteristics of particles dispersed, usually uniformly, in a supporting medium usually a fluid such as a liquid in which the particles are suspended. In one version, the particles normally absorb much, usually most, of the light striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally leaves layer 222. The particles in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by scattering much, usually most, of the light striking print area 118. This causes XTcl light, including XRcl light, to temporarily leave segment 232. Alternatively, the particles in layer 222 normally scatter much, usually most, of the light striking zone 112 so that ATcl light, including ARcl light, normally leaves layer 222. The particles in segment 232 respond to the control signal by absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area 118 for causing XTcl light to temporarily leave segment 232.
10402) The particles in core layer 222 in another version of the absorption-characteristics-changing implementation are elongated dichroic particles normally at largely random orientations with largely no electric field existing across layer 222. The particles in layer 222 normally absorb much, usually most, of the light WO 2018/085073 PCT/U S2017/(157934 striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally leaves layer 222. Responsive to the general CC control signal, the particles in core segment 232 align generally with an electric field produced across segment 232. Much, usually most, of the light striking print area 118 is transmitted through segment 232 for causing XTcl light, including reflected XRfe light, to temporarily leave segment 232.
Alternatively, an electric field normally exists across all of layer 222. The particles in layer 222 align with the electric field for enabling much, usually most, of the light striking zone 112 to be transmitted through layer 222 so that ATcl light, including reflected ARfe light, normally leaves layer 222. In response to the control signal, the particles in segment 232 become largely randomly oriented for absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area 118. XTcl light temporarily leaves segment 232.
10403j Core layer 222 in a further implementation, an example being an electrowefting or electrofluidic arrangement, of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs a liquid whose shape is suitably manipulated to change the layer's reflection characteristics. The liquid is in a first shape for causing layer 222 to reflect ARcl light such that ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through layer 222 is a majority component of A light. Responsive to the general CC control signal, the liquid in core segment 232 temporarily changes to a second shape materially different from the first shape in segment 232 for causing it to reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed with XRcl light and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passes through segment 232 and is a majority component of X light. Exemplary shapes for the liquid are described in U.S. Patents 6,917,456 B2, 7,463,398 B2, and 7,508,566 B2, contents incorporated by reference herein. Three major versions of the liquid shape-changing implementation entail arranging for (a) ARcl light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a majority component of X light, (b) ARcl light to be a majority component of A light with XRfe light being a majority component of X light, and (c) ARfe light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a majority component of X light.
10404j Turning to the two mixed-reflection embodiments of CC component 184, each mixed-reflection embodiment utilizes FA layer 206 for reflecting light in achieving color changing. Light striking core layer 222 along NE structure 224 passes through layer 222 to FE structure 226 at selected thickness locations along layer 222 at certain times and is blocked, i.e., reflected or/and absorbed, by layer 222 at other times. Light passing through selected thickness locations of layer 222 then passes through corresponding thickness locations of structure 226 and undergoes substantial reflection at corresponding thickness locations of FA layer 206.
Resultant reflected light passes back through structure 226 and core layer 222. Assembly 202 functions as a light valve. The difference between the mixed-reflection embodiments is that FA layer 206 reflects light only during the changed state in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment and only in the normal state in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment.
104051 The mixed-reflection RT embodiment employs normal ARab light reflection and temporary XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcI/XRfeIXRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcliARfe light reflection and XRfa light WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 reflection. During the normal state, the mixed-reflection RT embodiment operates the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104061 Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 during the changed state by allowing a substantial part of light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192, NA
segment 214, and NE segment 234 to temporarily pass through core segment 232 such that a substantial part of that light passes through FE segment 236. FA segment 216 temporarily reflects XRfa light, a majority component of X light. Total XTfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of temporarily reflected XRfa light.
104071 A substantial part of the XRfa light passes through FE segment 236 and, as also allowed by core segment 232, passes through it Total Vicl light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, mostly reflected XRfa light.
Total )(Tab light consists of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise mostly XRfa light.
Total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again mostly XRfa light.
Including any ARis light reflected by IS
segment 192, X light is formed with XRfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
104081 The mixed-reflection RN embodiment employs normal ARabiARfa light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcIARfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa light reflection and XRclIX.Rfe light reflection.
During the normal state, core layer 222 allows light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182, NA layer 204, and NE structure 224 to normally pass through core layer 222 such that a substantial part of that light normally passes through FE structure 226. FA layer 206 reflects ARfa light, a majority component of A
light. Total ATfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of normally reflected ARfa light.
104091 A substantial part of the ARfa light passes through FE structure 226 and, as also allowed by core layer 222, passes through it. Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light passing through layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it, mostly reflected ARfa light. Total ATab light consists of ARfa light passing through NE structure 224 and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise mostly ARfa light. Total ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS
component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 104101 Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-reflection embodiment. Accordingly, the mixed-reflection RN embodiment operates the same in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104111 In one version of each mixed-reflection embodiment of CC component 184, core layer 222 contains core particles distributed laterally across the layer's extent and switchable between light-transmissive and light-blocking states. NA layer 204 may be present or absent. FA layer 206 contains a light reflector extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226. The light reflector may be a specular (mirror-like) reflector or a diffuse reflector that reflectively scatters light.
104121 The core particles are usually dimensionally anisotrapic, each particle typically shaped generally like a rod or a sheet. For a rod-shaped core particle having (a) a maximum dimension, termed the long dimension, (b) a shorter dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the first short dimension, in a plane perpendicular to the long dimension, and (c) another shorter dimension which extends perpendicular to the other two dimensions and which reaches a maximum value, termed the second short dimension, no greater than the first short dimension, the long dimension is at least twice, preferably at least four times, more preferably at least eight times, the first short dimension. For a sheet-shaped core particle having (a) a maximum dimension, termed the first long dimension, (b) another dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the second long dimension, no greater than the first long dimension in a plane perpendicular to the first long dimension, and (c) a shorter dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the short dimension, and which extends perpendicular to the other two dimensions, the first long dimension is at least twice, preferably at least four times, more preferably at least eight times, the short dimension.
104131 The core particles in core layer 222 in the mixed-reflection RT
version are normally oriented largely randomly relative to electrode structures 224 and 226. This enables the core particles in layer 222 to absorb or/and scatter light striking it along NE structure 224. Either way, light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and NA layer 204 so as to strike core layer 222 along structure 224 is normally blocked from passing through layer 222. Total ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of any ARcl light reflected by it and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it.
104141 Applying the general CC control signal to AB segment 212 in the mixed-reflection RT version causes the core particles in core segment 232 to orient themselves generally perpendicular to electrode segments 234 and 236. In particular, the long dimension of a rod-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to segments 234 and 236 while one of the long dimensions of a sheet-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to segments 234 and 236 so that the general plane of the sheet-shaped particle is perpendicular to segments 234 and 236. This orientation enables light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 so as to strike core segment 232 along NE segment 234 to be temporarily transmitted through core segment 232 and reflected by the segment of the light reflector in FA

segment 216. The temporarily reflected XRfa light passes in substantial part back through core segment 232.
Total XTcl light leaving segment 232 consists of XRfa light passing through it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it.
104I5] Essentially the reverse occurs in the mixed-reflection RN version.
The core particles present in core layer 222 are normally oriented generally perpendicular to electrode structures 224 and 226. Specifically, the long dimension of a rod-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to structures 224 and 226 while one of the long dimensions of a sheet-shaped core particle extends generally perpendicular to structures 224 and 226 so that the general plane of the sheet-shaped particle is perpendicular to structures 224 and 226.
Light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and NA layer 204 so as to strike core layer 222 along NE structure 224 is transmitted through layer 222 and reflected by the light reflector. The normally reflected ARfa light passes in substantial part back through layer 222. Total ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of ARfa light passing through it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it.
104161 Applying the general CC control signal to AB segment 212 in the mixed-reflection RN version causes the core particles in core segment 232 to become randomly oriented relative to electrode segments 234 and 236. Light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 so as to strike core segment 232 along NE segment 234 is largely scattered or/and absorbed by the core particles in core segment 232 and is thereby blocked from passing through segment 232. Total XTcl light leaving segment 232 consists of any XRcl light reflected by it and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it.
104171 Core layer 222 consists of liquid-crystal material formed with elongated liquid-crystal molecules that constitute the core particles in another version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment of CC component 184 where it is a reflective liquid-crystal arrangement, usually polarizer-free. "LC" hereafter means liquid-crystal.
The LC molecules, which switch between light-transmissive and light-scattering states, can employ various LC
phases such as nematic, smectic, and chiral. The LC material typically has no pre-established twist. For this purpose, the surfaces of electrode structures 224 and 226 along layer 222 are preferably flat rather than grooved.
[04181 The reflected XRfa or ARfa light in each LC version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment usually appears along NE structure 224 as a dark color but, depending on the constituency of core layer 222, can appear along structure 224 as a light color. The dark color can be largely black. The scattered ARcl or XRcl light usually appears along NE structure 224 as a light color but, likewise depending on the constituency of layer 222, can appear along structure 224 as a dark color. The light color can be white or largely white.
104191 In a further version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment of CC component 184, core layer 222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which dipolar particles constituting the core particles are colloidally suspended. The dipolar particles, usually dichroic, can be elongated rod-like particles or flat sheet-like particles.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 Each dipole particle has a positively charged end and a negatively charged end. Voltage Vnf across opposite segments of electrode structures 224 and 226 is usually largely zero when the intervening dipole particles are randomly oriented so as to scatter or/and absorb light striking them.
Adjusting voltage V,:t across opposite segments of structures 224 and 226 to a non-zero value causes the intervening dipole particles to align generally perpendicular to those two electrode segments with the positively charged end of each intervening dipolar particle closest to the more negative one of the electrode segments and vice versa.
104201 Various color combinations are available with the dipolar-particle suspension. Subject to a dark color being produced along NE structure 224 if the dipolar particles in core layer 222 or core segment 232 absorb incident light due to being randomly oriented relative to electrode structures 224 and 226, the scattered ARcl or XRcl light in each mixed-reflection version can appear along NE
structure 224 as a light color, or as a dark color, if the dipolar particles across layer 222 or in segment 232 scatter incident light due to being randomly oriented relative to structures 224 and 226. The reflected XRfa or ARfa light correspondingly appears along NE
structure 224 as a dark color, or as a light color, depending on the characteristics of the light reflector.
104211 The deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs normal ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa light reflection and XRia light reflection. Light striking SF zone 112 passes through IS component 182, NA
layer 204, NE structure 224, core layer 222, and FE structure 226, is reflected by FA layer 206, and then passes back through subcomponents 226, 222, 224, and 182. Core layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 usually impose certain traits, e.g., wavelength-independent traits such as polarization traits, on the light. "WI' hereafter means wavelength-independent.
104221 When WI traits are employed, the deep-reflection embodiment operates as follows during the normal state. NA layer 204 typically imposes a WI NA incoming trait on light normally passing from IS
component 182 through layer 204 so that the light has the NA incoming trait upon reaching core layer 222, "NA"
again meaning near auxiliary. Layer 222 imposes a WI primary incoming trait on light normally passing from NE
structure 224 through layer 222 so that the light has the primary incoming trait upon reaching FA layer 206. The primary incoming trait usually differs materially from the NA incoming trait, 104231 FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light, a majority component of A
light, so that total ATfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of normally reflected ARfa light. As an adjunct to reflecting ARfa light, layer 206 typically imposes a WI FA trait on ARfa light leaving layer 206 along FE
structure 226, "FA" again meaning far auxiliary. The FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after reflection by layer 206. The FA trait can be the same as, or significantly different from, the NA incoming trait.
104241 The ARfa light passes in substantial part through FE structure 226.
Total ATfe light consists of ARfa light passing through structure 226 and any ARfe light reflected by it, mostly ARfa light having the FA trait.

The A-Fie light passes in substantial part through core layer 222 and NE
structure 224. In transmitting ATfe light, layer 222 imposes a WI primary outgoing trait on ATfe light passing from FE
structure 226 through layer 222 so that the ATfe light has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204.
The primary outgoing and incoming traits are usually the same. Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light passing through core layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, mostly ARfa light having the primary outgoing trait. The ATcl light passes in substantial part through NE structure 224.
Total ATab light consists of ARfa light passing through structure 224 and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise mostly ARfa light.
104251 The ATab light passes in substantial part through NA layer 204 and IS component 182. If the NA
incoming trait is imposed on light passing from component 182 through layer 204, layer 204 usually imposes a WI NA outgoing trait on ATab light passing from NE structure 224 through layer 204 so that ATab light has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching component 182. The NA outgoing and incoming traits are usually the same.
Total ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including any ARis light normally reflected by component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
104261 Core segment 232 in the deep-reflection embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by causing light passing from NE segment 234 through core segment 232 to be temporarily of a WI changed incoming trait such that the light has the changed incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. More particularly, if NA layer 204 imposes the NA incoming trait on light normally passing from IS component 182 through layer 204, NA segment 214 imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192 through segment 214 so that the light has the NA incoming trait upon reaching core segment 232. Segment 232 then imposes the changed incoming trait on light temporarily passing from NE segment 234 through segment 232 so that the light has the changed incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. The changed incoming trait differs materially from the primary incoming trait.
104271 FA segment 216 temporarily reflects XRfa light, a majority component of X light, so that total XTfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of temporarily reflected XRfa light.
Although the primary and changed incoming traits are independent of wavelength, the material difference between them is chosen to cause color XRfa to differ materially from color ARfa. More specifically, colors ARfa and XRfa usually have the same wavelength characteristics but differ materially in radiosity so as to differ materially in lightness/darkness and therefore materially in color. Core segment 232 and AB segment 212 function as a light valve in producing the color difference. In the course of reflecting XRfa light, FA segment 216 imposes the FA trait on XRfa light leaving it along FE segment 236 if FA layer 206 imposes the FA trait on ARfa light leaving layer 206 along FE
structure 226. The FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after reflection by FA segment 216.

WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 104281 The XRfa light passes in substantial part through FE segment 236.
Total XTfe light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 236 and any XRfe light reflected by it, mostly XRfa light having the FA trait.
The XTfe light passes in substantial part through core segment 232. In transmitting XTfe light, segment 232 imposes a WI changed outgoing trait on XTfe light passing from FE segment 236 through segment 232 so that the XTfe light has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214.
The changed outgoing trait, usually the same as the changed incoming trait, differs materially from the primary incoming and outgoing traits.
Total XTcl light consists of XRfa light passing through core segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any XRfe light passing through it, mostly XRfa light now having the changed outgoing trait. Any XRcl light is usually largely ARcl light. The XTcl light passes in substantial part through NA
segment 214. Total XTab light consists of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise mostly XRfa light.
104291 The XTab light passes in substantial part through NA segment 214 and IS segment 192. If NA
segment 214 imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192 through NA segment 214, segment 214 imposes the NA outgoing trait on XTab light passing from NE
segment 234 through segment 214 so that XTab light has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching IS segment 192.
Including any ARna light reflected by NA segment 214, total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again mostly XRfa light. Similarly including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XRfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
104301 The deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 is typically a reflective LC structure in which core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as nematic liquid crystal formed with elongated LC particles.
FA layer 206 contains a light reflector extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226. The light reflector, specular or diffuse, is designed to reflect ARfa light during the normal state such that the segment of the light reflector in FA segment 216 reflects XRfa light during the changed state. The reflector is a white-light reflector if one of colors ARfa and XRfa is white. If neither is white, the reflector can be a color reflector or a white-light reflector and a color filter lying between the white-light reflector and structure 226.
104311 NA layer 204 usually contains a near (first) plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, NE structure 224. If so, FA layer 206 contains a far (second) plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226 so as to extend generally parallel to the near polarizer. The far polarizer is located between structure 226 and the light reflector.
104321 Each polarizer has a polarization direction parallel to the plane of that polarizer. "PZ" hereafter means polarization. The PZ direction of the near polarizer is termed the p direction. The direction parallel to the plane of the near polarizer and perpendicular to the p direction is termed the s direction, The PZ direction of the far polarizer is typically perpendicular to, or parallel to, the near polarizer's PZ direction but can be at a non-zero WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 angle materially different from 90' to the PZ direction. In the following description of the operation of the reflective LC structure, the polarizers have perpendicular PZ directions so that the far polarizer's PZ direction is the s direction.
104331 Relative to the near polarizer, incoming light striking NA layer 204 consists of a p directional component and an s directional component. For each color A or X, the near polarizer transmits a high percentage, usually at least 70%, preferably at least 80%, more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95%, of the p component and blocks, preferably absorbs, the s component.
Light passing through the near polarizer so as to strike assembly 202 is plane polarized in the PZ direction of the near polarizer, i.e., the p direction. The plane polarized light passes in substantial part through the LC
material.
104341 The elongated particles of the LC material in core layer 222 are normally in an orientation which causes the PZ direction of incoming incident p polarized light to rotate a primary LC amount so that the transmitted light leaving the LC material and striking the far polarizer is plane polarized in a direction materially different from the p direction. The primary LC amount of the PZ direction rotation is usually 45 - 90' for which an actual PZ direction rotation of greater than 360' is converted to an effective PZ direction rotation by subtracting 360' one or more times until the resultant rotation value is less than 360 . For each color A or X, the far polarizer transmits a high percentage, usually at least 70%, preferably at least 80%, more preferably at least 90%, even more preferably at least 95% of incident s polarized light and blocks, preferably absorbs, any other incident light. The radiosity of the s polarized light passing through the far polarizer increases as the effective PZ direction rotation provided by the LC material moves toward 90'.
104351 A substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the far polarizer is normally reflected by the light reflector and passes back through the far polarizer, the LC
material, and the near polarizer. The far polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the s direction so that reflected light passing through the far polarizer largely forms ARfa light plane polarized in the s direction. The LC material causes reflected incident s polarized ARfa light to undergo a rotation in PZ direction largely equal to the primary LC amount. The near polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in largely any direction other than the p direction so that reflected light passing through the near polarizer includes ARfa light plane polarized in the p direction. The radiosity of the reflected p polarized ARfa light passing through the near polarizer increases as the effective PZ
direction rotation provided by the LC
material moves toward 90'.
(04361 Core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal provided during the changed state by causing the LC particles in segment 232 to change to an orientation materially different from their orientation in the normal state such that incoming plane polarized light passing through segment 232 and striking the segment of the far polarizer in segment 216 of FA layer 206 is plane polarized in a materially different direction than incoming plane polarized light passing through core layer 222 and striking the far polarizer during the normal WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934 state. The LC-particle orientation change in core segment 232 may entail rotating the PZ direction of plane polarized light passing through segment 232 by a changed LC rotational amount usually less than 450. If so, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by segment 232 during the changed state is materially different from, usually materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by layer 222 during the normal state.
104371 During the changed state, the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 transmits a high percentage of incident polarized light plane polarized in the s direction and blocks, preferably absorbs, incident light plane polarized in largely any other direction just as in the normal state. However, the radiosity of the reflected s polarized light temporarily passing through the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the reflected s polarized light normally passing through the far polarizer because the effective PZ direction rotation, if any, temporarily provided by the LC
material in core segment 232 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation normally provided by the LC material in core layer 222.
10438) A substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the far polarizer segment in FA
segment 216 during the changed state is reflected by the segment of the light reflector in FA segment 216 and passes back through the far polarizer segment in segment 216, core segment 232, and the segment of the near polarizer in NA segment 214. The far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the s direction so that reflected light passing through the far polarizer segment in segment 216 largely forms XRfa light plane polarized in the s direction. To the extent that the PZ direction of incoming p polarized XRfa light leaving the near polarizer segment in NA
segment 214 temporarily undergoes rotation, the LC material in core segment 232 causes reflected incident s polarized XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction. The near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the p direction so that reflected light passing through the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 includes XRfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
104391 The radiosity of the reflected p plane polarized XRfa light temporarily passing through the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the reflected p plane polarized ARfa light normally passing through the near polarizer because the radiosity of the reflected s plane polarized XRfa light temporarily passing through the far polarizer segment in FA segment 216 differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the reflected s plane polarized ARfa light normally passing through the far polarizer due to the effective PZ direction rotation, if any, temporarily provided by core segment 232 differing materially from, usually being materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation normally provided by core layer 222. Colors ARfa and XRfa normally have the same wavelength characteristics. However, the material difference in radiosity between the resultant reflected p plane polarized XRfa light temporarily leaving NA segment 214 and the resultant reflected p plane polarized ARfa light normally leaving NA layer 204 by itself, or in combination with other reflected light leaving print area 118 during the - .100 -changed state and SF zone 112 during the normal state enables color X to differ materially from color A. With color XRfa being of materially lower radiosity than color ARfa, color X is materially lighter than color A even though the wavelength characteristics of ARfa and XRfa light are the same. For instance, color X can be pink while color A is red.
104401 The WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment are embodied as follows in the reflective LC
structure with the polarizers having perpendicular PZ directions. For the NA
incoming and outgoing traits, the near polarizer causes light passing either way through NA layer 204 to be plane polarized in the p direction. For the FA trait, the far polarizer causes light passing either way through the FA
layer 206 to be plane polarized in the s direction. For the primary incoming and outgoing traits, the LC material in core layer 222 causes the PZ
direction of plane polarized light passing either way through layer 222 during the normal state to rotate the primary LC rotational amount, usually 45' - 90'. For the changed incoming and outgoing traits, the segment of the LC material in core segment 232 causes the PZ direction of light passing through segment 232 during the changed state to rotate the changed LC rotational amount, usually less than 45 , if the LC material in segment 232 undergoes any PZ direction rotation during the changed state.
104411 When the polarizers in the reflective LC structure have parallel PZ
directions with the near polarizer causing light passing either way through NA layer 204 to be plane polarized in the p direction, the actions performed by the far polarizer and the LC material during the normal and changed states are opposite from the actions performed by the far polarizer and the LC material when the polarizers in the reflective LC structure have perpendicular PZ directions. The WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment are then embodied as follows. For the FA trait, the far polarizer causes light passing either way through FA
layer 206 to be plane polarized in the p direction. For the primary incoming and outgoing traits, the LC material in core layer 222 causes the PZ
direction of plane polarized light normally passing either way through layer 222 to rotate a primary LC amount, usually less than 45', if the LC material in layer 222 normally undergoes any PZ direction rotation. For the changed incoming and outgoing traits, the segment of the LC material in core segment 232 causes the PZ
direction of light temporarily passing through segment 232 to rotate a changed LC amount, usually 45 - 90 .
Emission-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly 104421 Six general embodiments of CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 are based on changes in light emission. These six embodiments are termed the mid-emission ET, mid-emission EN, mid-emission EN-ET, deep-emission ET, deep-emission EN, and deep-emission EN-ET embodiments. The above-described preliminary specifications for the four CC-component light-reflection embodiments apply to these six CC-component light-emission embodiments.
104431 Beginning with the three mid-emission embodiments of CC component 184, FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in color changing in any of the mid-emission embodiments. There is largely no ARfa, AEfa,

-101 -WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 XRfa, or XEfa light, and thus largely no ADfa, ATfa, XDfa, or XTfa light, in any of the mid-emission embodiments. The difference between the two single mid-emission embodiments is that core layer 222 emits light only during the changed state in the mid-emission ET embodiment and only during the normal state in the mid-emission EN embodiment. Layer 222 emits light during both states in the mid-emission EN-ET
embodiment [04441 The mid-emission ET embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection and temporary XEab light emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcliARfe light reflection and temporary XEcl light emission-ARne/XRcUXRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcVARfe light reflection and XEcl light emission. During the normal state, the mid-emission ET embodiment operates the same as the mixed-reflection RT embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104451 During the changed state, core segment 232 in the mid-emission ET
embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by temporarily emitting XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light.
Total XTcl light consists of XEcl light, any XRcl light reflected by segment 232, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, usually mostly temporarily emitted XEcl light. Any reflected XRcl light is usually largely ARcl light. Total XTab light consists of XDab light formed with XEcl light passing through NE segment 234, any ARne light reflected by it, and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEcl light. Total XTcc light consists of XEcl light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again usually mostly XEcl light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl and XRfe light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138.
10446) The mid-emission EN embodiment utilizes normal AEab light emission-ARab light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEcl light emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEol light emission and XRcUXRfe light reflection. During the normal state, core layer 222 normally emits AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light. Total ATcl light consists of AEcl light, any ARcl light reflected by layer 222, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it, usually mostly normally emitted AEcl light. Total ATab light consists of ADab light formed with AEcl light passing through NE structure 224, any ARne light reflected by it, and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly AEcl light. Total ATcc light consists of AEcl light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again usually mostly AEcl light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with AEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
- .102 -104471 Core layer 222 in the mid-emission EN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment, Hence, the mid-emission EN
embodiment operates the same in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104481 Assembly 202 in mid-emission EN or ET embodiment may be one or more of the following light-processing arrangements: a cathodoluminescent arrangement, an electrochromic fluorescent arrangement, an electrochromic luminescent arrangement, an electrochromic phosphorescent arrangement, an electroluminescent arrangement, an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) arrangement (such as a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure), a field-emission arrangement, a light-emitting diode arrangement, a light-emitting electrochemical cell arrangement, an organic light-emitting diode arrangement, an organic light-emitting transistor arrangement, a photoluminescent arrangement, a plasma panel arrangement, a guantum-dot light-emitting diode arrangement, a surface-conduction-emission arrangement, and a vacuum fluorescent (display) arrangement.
104491 Core layer 222 in each light-processing arrangement usually contains a multiplicity of light-emissive elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222. "LE" hereafter means light-emissive. Each LE element lies between a small part of NE structure 224 and a generally oppositely situated small part of FE structure 226 for which these two parts of electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy approximately the same lateral area as that LE element. The LE elements continuously or selectively emit light during operation of 01 structure 200 depending on factors such as their locations in layer 222. The LE elements reflect light constituting part or all of the ARcl light during the normal state. Core segment 232 contains a submultiplicity of the LE elements. The LE
elements in segment 232 reflect light constituting part or all of the XRcl light during the changed state.
104501 During the normal state in the mid-emission ET embodiment of each light-processing arrangement with control voltage V11 along core layer 222 at normal value VON, the LE
elements either no light or emit light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves layer 222 along NE structure 224. When voltage Vo along core segment 232 goes to value VOC to initiate the changed state, the LE elements in segment 232 emit XEcl light, again usually a majority component of X light, leaving segment 232. When voltage \int along segment 232 returns to value \Inn the LE elements in segment 232 return to emitting no light or to emitting light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234.
104511 The opposite occurs in the mid-emission EN embodiment of each light-processing arrangement.
With voltage Vnt along core layer 222 being value VniN during the normal state, the LE elements emit AEcl light, again usually a majority component of A light, leaving layer 222. When voltage WI along core segment 232 goes to value \info to initiate the changed state, the LE elements in segment 232 either emit no light or continue to emit light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234.
When voltage Vnt along core segment 232 returns to value Vntiq, the LE
elements in segment 232 return to emitting AEcl light leaving it.
- .103 -WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 [0452] The LE elements are at fixed locations in core layer 222, and thus in CC component 184, in one version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment. In the mid-emission ET
version, the LE elements emit no light during the normal state. In the mid-emission EN version, the LE elements in core segment 232 largely cease emitting light in response to the general CC control signal so as to emit no light during the changed state.
[04531 Each LE element has an element emissive area across which AEcl light is emitted during the normal state in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light is emitted during the changed state in the mid-emission ET embodiment if that LE element is in IDVC portion 138. AEcl or XEcl light of each LE element can be emitted relatively uniformly across its emissive area. Alternatively, each LE element includes three or more LE subelements, each operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white. Each LE
subelement usually emits its primary color across a subelement emissive subarea of the emissive area of its LE element. The standard human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the LE
subelements in each LE element of the mid-emission EN embodiment as color AEcl if the AEcl light traveled to the human eye unaccompanied by other light. The same applies to color XEcl and XEcl light for each LE
element in portion 138 of the mid-emission ET embodiment.
104541 The radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each element emissive area can be programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of 01 structure 200 for adjusting AEcl light, and thus A light, in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light, and thus X light, in the mid-emission ET embodiment. The programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing the LE subelements operable for emitting light of that primary color with a programming voltage that causes them to emit light of their primary color at radiosity suitable for the desired AEcl light in the mid-emission EN
embodiment and suitable for the desired XEcl light in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
104551 Another version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment entails providing the LE elements in a supporting medium, usually a fluid such as a liquid, in core layer 222. The supporting medium is a medium color M1Rc materially different from temporary emitted core color XEcl. Hence, the medium reflects MtRc light and absorbs or/and transmits other light. The LE elements have electrical characteristics, typically electrical charging, which enable them to translate (move) in response to a changing electric field. Also, the LE elements are usually of an LE-element color L1Rc so as reflect Ll Rc light and absorb or/and transmit, preferably absorb, other light.
104561 In the mid-emission ET translating-element version, setting voltage V at normal value Vriftl laterally along core layer 222 results in the LE elements being normally distributed in the medium such that, even if they emit light, largely none of the emitted light leaves layer 222 along NE
structure 224. Specifically, the LE
elements are normally dispersed throughout the medium or situated adjacent to FE structure 226 so as to be averagely remote from NE structure 224. The medium absorbs any light emitted by the LE elements and - .104 -traveling toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects Mi Rc light and since the LE elements reflect Li Rc light, ARcl light normally leaving layer 222 consists of Mi Rc light and any Li Rc light. Total ATcl light consists of Mi Rc light and any Li Rc and XRfe light. Any LiRc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224 is of low radiosity compared to Mi Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224.
104571 The Voc polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE
elements are chosen such that the LE elements in core segment 232 translate so as to be adjacent to NE
segment 234 when voltage Vnt along segment 232 goes to changed value Võfc. The LE elements in segment 232 then emit XEcl light leaving it. With XRcl light leaving segment 232 consisting of Mi Rc and Li Rc light, total XTcl light consists of XEcl, Mi Rc, and Li Rc light and any ARfe light so as to differ materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222. The same result is achieved by reversing both the VIC polarity and the characteristics of the LE elements.
104581 The mid-emission EN translating-element version operates in the opposite way. Setting voltage \Int at value Vrc laterally along core layer 222 results in the LE elements normally being adjacent to NE structure 224. The LE elements normally emit AEcl light leaving layer 222. Since the medium reflects Mi Rc light and since the LE elements reflect Li Rc light, ARcl light normally leaving layer 222 consists of Mi Rc and Li Rc light.
Total Aid light consists of AEcl, Mi Rc, and LiRc light and any ARfe light.
10459 j Changing voltage Vnf in core segment 232 to value VrE causes the LE
elements in segment 232 to translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234. In particular, the LE elements in segment 232 become dispersed throughout it or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. The segment of the medium in core segment 232 absorbs any light emitted by the LE elements in segment 232 and traveling toward NE segment 234. With XRcl light leaving segment 232 consisting largely of Mi Rc light and any Li Rc light, total XTcl light consists largely of Mi Rc light and any Li Rc and ARfe light and differs materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222. Any LiRc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 is of low radiosity compared to Mi Rc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE
segment 234. The same result is again achieved by reversing both the VIC polarity and the characteristics of the LE elements.
10460) Various mechanisms can cause the LE elements in the translating-element version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment to emit XEcl or AEcl light. The LE elements can emit light an electrochromic fluorescently, electrochromic luminescently, electrochromic phosphorescently, or electroluminescently in response to an alternating-current voltage signal imposed on voltage \iinf.
The LE elements can emit light photoluminescently in response to electromagnetic radiation provided from a source outside assembly 202.
"EM" hereafter means electromagnetic. The EM radiation is typically IR
radiation but can be light or UV
radiation, usually UV radiation just beyond the visible spectrum. The radiation source is typically in FA layer 206 but can be in NA layer 204. The EM radiation can sometimes simply be ambient light. In addition, the LE
elements can sometimes emit light naturally, i.e., without external stimulus.

1 046 1I The LE elements in the translating-element version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment can emit light continuously during operation of 01 structure 200. This can occur in response to EM radiation provided from a source of EM radiation. If so and if the EM radiation source is capable of being switched between radiating (on) and non-radiating (off) states, the radiation source is usually placed in the non-radiating state when structure 200 is out of operation so as to save power.
Alternatively, the LE elements in core segment 232 of the mid-emission ET version can emit XEcl light in response to the general CC control signal but be non-emissive of light at other times. In a complementary manner, the LE
elements in segment 232 of the mid-emission EN version can normally emit AEcl light and become non-emissive of light in response to the control signal.
1 046 2 1 The mid-emission EN-ET embodiment utilizes normal AEab light emission-ARab light reflection and temporary XEab light emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEcl light emission-ARne/ARcVARfe light reflection and temporary XEcl light emission-ARne/XRclIXRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEcl light emission and XEcl light emission. The mid-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same during the normal state as the mid-emission EN embodiment. Core segment 232 in the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
Hence, the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same during the changed state as the mid-emission ET embodiment 1 0463 1 Assembly 202 in the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment can generally be any one or more of the above light-processing arrangements usable to implement the mid-emission EN
and ET embodiments subject to modification of each light-processing arrangement to be capable of emitting both AEcl light and XEcl light. In one modification, core layer 222 contains a multiplicity of first LE elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222 and a multiplicity of second LE elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222 and thus approximately uniformly among the first LE elements. Each LE element lies between a small part of NE
structure 224 and a generally oppositely situated small part of FE structure 226 for which these two parts of electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy approximately the same lateral area as that LE element. Core segment 232 contains a submultiplicity of the first LE elements and a submultiplicity of the second LE elements.
The mechanisms causing the first and second LE elements to emit light are the same as those described above for causing the LE elements in the above-described version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment to emit light.
1 0464 1 The first and second LE elements, i.e., all the properly functioning ones, have the following light-emitting capabilities. The first LE elements emit light of wavelength for a first LE emitted color P1Ec during the normal state in which voltage VI between electrode structures 226 and 224 is at value VõfN such that P1Ec light leaves core layer 222 and exits VC region 106. During the changed state with voltage VI between the two parts of structures 226 and 224 for each LE element in core segment 232 at value VrifC, the first LE elements outside segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222 and exiting region 106. The first LE elements in -'106-segment 232 may or may not emit P1Ec light leaving segment 232 and exiting IDVC portion 138 during the changed state depending on which of the switching modes, described below, is used. The circumstance of a first LE element in segment 232 not providing light leaving portion 138 during the changed state can be achieved by having that element temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light that temporarily does not leave portion 138, e.g., due to absorption in segment 232.
104651 The second LE elements in core segment 232 emit light of wavelength for a second LE emitted color QlEc during the changed state such that QlEc light leaves segment 232 and exits IDVC portion 138. The second LE elements outside segment 232 may or may not emit Q1Ec light which leaves core layer 222 and exits VC region 106 during the changed state depending on which of the switching modes is used. The same applies to the second LE elements during the normal state. The circumstance of a second LE element not providing light leaving region 106 during the normal or changed state can be achieved by having that element normally or temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light that normally or temporarily does not leave region 106, e.g., due to absorption in layer 222.
104661 Additionally, the first LE elements usually reflect light striking them and of wavelength for a first LE
reflected color P1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other incident light. PIRG light may or may not leave core layer 222 and exit VC region 106 during the normal and changed states. Similarly, the second LE elements usually reflect light striking them and of wavelength for a second LE reflected color Q1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other incident light. Q1Rc light may or may not leave layer 222 and exit region 106 during the normal and changed states.
104671 Subject to the preceding emission/reflection specifications, the first and second LE elements operate in one of the following three switching modes. In a first LE switching mode, the first and second LE
elements respectively normally emit P1Ec and QlEc light which forms AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light, leaving core layer 222 along NE structure 224 and then leaving VC
region 106 via SF zone 112. Total ATcl light consists of P1Ec and QlEc light and any ARcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec and Q1Ec light, where the ARcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light. The first LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light leaving IDVC portion 138 via print area 118. The second LE elements in segment 232 continue to emit QlEc light which forms XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light, leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 via area 118. Total XTcl light consists largely of QlEc light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly QlEc light, where the XRcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1 Rc light.
104681 In a second LE switching mode, the first LE elements normally emit PlEc light which forms AEcl light, usually a majority component of A light, leaving core layer 222 along NE structure 234 and then leaving VC
region 106 via SF zone 112. The second LE elements normally emit largely no light leaving region 106 along zone 112. Total ATcl light consists largely of P1Ec light and any ARcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec light, -'107-WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 where the ARcl light again includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light. Upon occurrence of the general CC control signal, the first LE elements in core segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light leaving it along NE segment 234 and then leaving IDVC portion .138 via print area 118. The second LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily emitting Q1 Ec light leaving segment 232 via NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 via area 1.18. P1Ec and QlEc light form XEcl light, usually a majority component of X
light. Total XTcl light consists of P1Ec and Q1 Ec light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec and Q1Ec light, where the XRcl light again includes any P1 Rc and QlRe light.
104691 In a third LE switching mode, the first and second LE elements operate the same during the normal state as in the second LE switching mode. The first LE elements in core segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light leaving IDVC
portion 138 along print area 118. The second LE elements in segment 232 respond to the control signal by temporarily emitting QlEc light which forms XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light, temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then leaving portion 138 along area 118. As in the first LE switching mode, total XTcl light consists largely of QlEc light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly Q1 Ec light, where the XRcl light includes any PiRc and Q1 Rc light.
104701 The first and second LE elements are at fixed locations in core layer 222 and thus in CC
component 184 in a version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing each LE switching mode.
During the normal state in the version implementing the third LE switching mode, the first LE elements emit P1Ec light while the second LE elements emit no light. During the changed state, the second LE elements in core segment 232 temporarily emit QlEc light in response to the general CC
control signal while the first LE
elements in segment 232 become non-emissive in response to the control signal.
104711 When the first and second LE elements are fixedly located in core layer 222, those LE elements also usually have the physical characteristics of the fixed-location LE
elements in the mid-emission ET or EN
embodiment Accordingly, each first or second LE element can include three or more LE subelements, each operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors, e.g., again red, green, and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white. The standard human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the first or second LE subelements in each LE element as color P1 Ec or QlEc if the PlEc or QlEc light traveled to the human eye unaccompanied by other light.
104721 The radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each emissive area can be programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of 01 structure 200 for enabling AEcl and XEcl light, and thus A and X light, to be adjusted. The programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing the LE subelements operable for emitting light of that primary color with a selected programming voltage that causes those LE subelements to emit their primary color at radiosities suitable for the desired AEcl and XEcl light.
- .108 -104731 Another version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing the third LE switching mode entails providing the two sets of LE elements in a supporting medium, usually a fluid such as a liquid, in core layer 222. The supporting medium is again generally of medium color M1Rc. The medium is preferably transparent so that the MiRc radiosity is close to zero. The LE elements have electrical characteristics, typically electrical charging, which enable the second LE elements to translate oppositely to the first LE elements in the presence of an electric field. Setting voltage \int at normal value VntN
laterally along layer 222 causes the first LE
elements to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the second LE elements are averagely remote from structure 224. In particular, the second LE elements are normally dispersed throughout the medium or situated adjacent to FE structure 226. The first LE elements emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222 along NE structure 224 and then VC region 106 via SF zone 112. The medium absorbs light emitted by the second LE elements and traveling toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects M1Rc light and since the first and second LE elements respectively reflect P1Rc and Q1 Re light, total ATcl light consists largely of PlEc and PIRG light and any Q1Rc, M1Rc, and ARfe light. Any Q1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224 is of low radiosity compared to P1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224.
104741 The WIC: polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE
elements are chosen such that changing voltage VI along core segment 232 to value Vflfc causes the second LE
elements in segment 232 to translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 while the first LE elements in core segment 232 oppositely translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234. In particular, the first LE elements in core segment 232 become temporarily dispersed throughout the segment of the medium in segment 232 or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. The second LE elements in core segment 232 emit QlEc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and then IDVC portion 138 via print area 118. The medium absorbs light emitted by the first LE elements in core segment 232 and traveling toward NE segment 234.
With the segment of the medium in core segment 232 reflecting M1Rc light and with the first and second LE elements respectively reflecting P1Rc and Q1Rc light, total XTcl light consists largely of QlEc and Q1 Rc light and any P1Poc, M1Rc, and ARfe light and differs materially from the ATcl light normally leaving core layer 222. During the changed state, any P1Rc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 is of low radiosity compared to Q1Rc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234.
104751 The first and second LE elements may emit light continuously during operation of 01 structure 200 in the preceding version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment. This can occur in response to EM radiation provided from an EM radiation source. If so and if the radiation source can be switched between radiating and non-radiating states, the radiation source is usually placed in the non-radiating state when structure 200 is out of operation so as to save power. Alternatively, the second LE elements in core segment 232 can emit XEcl light in response to the general CC control signal but be non-emissive at other times while the first LE elements emit AEcl light continuously during operation of structure 200 or normally emit AEcl light but become non-emissive in response to the control signal.
-'109-104761 Moving to the three deep-emission embodiments of CC component 184, FA layer 206 is utilized in each deep-emission embodiment for emitting light in making color change. The difference between the single deep-emission embodiments is that light emitted by layer 206 passes through core layer 222 only during the changed state in the deep-emission ET embodiment but only in the normal state in the deep-emission EN
embodiment. Light emitted by FA layer 206 passes through core layer 222 during both states in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment.
104771 The deep-emission ET embodiment employs normal ARab light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcVARfe light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-ARne/XRcVXRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcVARfe light reflection and XEfa light emission. The deep-emission ET embodiment is similar to the mixed-reflection RI embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission ET embodiment emits light and lacks the light reflector of the mixed-reflection RI embodiment. During the normal state, the deep-emission ET
embodiment operates the same as the mid-emission ET embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104781 Core segment 232 in the deep-emission ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 during the changed state by allowing a substantial part of XEfa light, usually a majority component of X light, emitted by FA segment 216 and passing through FE segment 236 to temporarily pass through core segment 232. Total Xifa light consists of XEfa light and any XRfa light reflected by FA segment 216, usually mostly emitted XEfa light.
104791 A substantial part of any XRfa light passes through FE segment 236 and, as allowed by core segment 232, through it. Total XT.c1 light consists of XEfa light passing through segment 232, any XRfa light passing through it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it, usually mostly XEfa light. Total XTab light consists of XEfa light passing through NE segment 234, any XRfa light passing through it, and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by it and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEfa light. Total XTcc light consists of XEfa light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light passing through it, again usually mostly XEfa light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. XEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X light.
104801 The deep-emission EN embodiment employs normal AEfa light emission-ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEfa light emission-ARne/ARcVARfe/ARfa light reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEfa light emission and XRcl/XRfe light reflection. The deep-emission EN embodiment is similar to the mixed-reflection RN embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission EN embodiment emits light and lacks the light reflector of the single mixed-reflection RN embodiment. During the normal state, core layer 222 in the deep-emission EN
embodiment allows AEfa light, usually a majority component of A light, emitted by FA layer 206 and passing through FE structure 226 to pass through core layer 222. Total ATfa light consists of AEfa light and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206, usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
104811 A substantial part of any ARfa light passes through FE structure 226 and, as allowed by core layer 222, through it. Total ATcl light consists of AEfa light passing through layer 222, any ARfa light passing through it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it, usually mostly emitted AEfa light. Total ATab light consists of AEfa light passing through NE
structure 224, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing through it, again usually mostly AEfa light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with AEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light temporarily leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. AEfa fight is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A light.
104821 Core segment 232 in the deep-emission EN embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-emission EN embodiment. Consequently, the deep-emission EN embodiment operates the same during the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104831 In one implementation of the deep-emission ET or EN embodiment, core layer 222 contains dimensionally anisotropic core particles distributed laterally across the layer's extent and switchable between light-transmissive and light-blocking states. The core particles have the characteristics described above for the implementation of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing dimensionally anisotropic core particles.
NA layer 204 may or may not be present in this deep-emission ET or EN
implementation. FA layer 206 in the deep-emission ET or EN implementation contains a light emitter extending along, and generally parallel to, FE
structure 226. The deep-emission ET or EN implementation is configured the same as the implementation of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing anisotropic core particles except that the light emitter replaces the light reflector. The deep-emission ET or EN implementation operates the same as the mixed-reflection RT or RN implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except as described below.
104841 The deep-emission ET implementation operates the same as the mixed-reflection RT
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except that, during the changed state, the combination of XEla light emitted by the segment of the light emitter in FA segment 216 and any XRfa light reflected by segment 216 replaces XRfa light reflected by the segment of the light reflector in segment 216. The light emitter may continuously emit XEfa light during operation of the deep-emission ET
implementation. Alternatively, the light WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 emitter may respond to the general CC control signal by emitting XEfa light only during the changed state in order to reduce power consumption.
104851 The deep-emission EN implementation operates the same as the mixed-reflection RN
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except that, during the normal state, the combination of AEfa light emitted by the light emitter and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206 replaces ARfa light reflected by the light reflector. The light emitter usually continuously emits AEfa light during operation of the deep-emission EN
implementation.
[0486] Core layer 222 consists of LC material formed with elongated LC
molecules constituting the core particles in one version of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation for which CC component 184 consists of a reflective LC arrangement, typically polarizer-free. In another version of the deep-emission ET or EN
implementation, layer 222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which dipolar particles constituting the core particles are colloidally suspended. These two versions of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation are respectively configured and operable as described above for the two versions of the mixed-reflection RT or RN
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles formed respectively with elongated LC molecules and with dipolar particles subject to (a) the light emitter replacing the light reflector, (b) the changed-state combination of XEfa light emitted by the segment of the light emitter in FA segment 216 and any XRfa light reflected by segment 216 replacing XRfa light reflected by the segment of the light reflector in segment 216, and (c) the normal-state combination of AEfa light emitted by the light emitter and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206 replacing ARfa light reflected by the light reflector.
104871 The deep-emission EN-ET embodiment employs normal AEfa light emission-ARab/ARfa light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEfa light emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfelARfa light reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-ARne/XRcI/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to AEfa light emission and XEfa light emission. The deep-emission EN-ET
embodiment is similar to the deep-reflection embodiment except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission EN-ET
embodiment emits light and lacks the strong light-reflection capability of the deep-reflection embodiment. Core layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 are usually employed in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment for imposing certain traits, usually WI traits such as PZ traits, on light emitted by FA layer 206 and passing through FE structure 226, core layer 222, NE structure 224, NA layer 204, and IS
component 182. In particular, the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same as the deep-reflection embodiment when WI traits are employed except as described below.
104881 During the normal state, FA layer 206 emits AEfa light, usually a majority component of A light.
Layer 206 also typically reflects ARfa light. Total ATfa light consists of AEfa light and any ARfa light, usually mostly emitted AEfa light. Layer 206 typically imposes the FA trait on the AEfa light and on at least part of the ARfa light.

[0489] The remaining light processing during the normal state in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment is the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment except that the combination of AEfa light and any ARfa light replaces ARfa light. Total ATfe light consists of AEfa light passing through FE structure 226, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly AEfa light. ATfe light passing through core layer 222 has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204. Total ATcl light consists of AEfa light passing through core layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe and ARfa light passing through it, usually mostly AEfa light having the primary outgoing trait. Total ATab light consists of AEfa light passing through NE structure 224, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly AEfa light.
10490! ATab light passing through NA layer 204 typically has the NA
outgoing trait upon reaching IS
component 182. Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light passing through layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing through it, again usually mostly AEfa light. Including any ARis light normally reflected by component 182, A light is formed with AEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. AEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A
light.
10491] During the changed state, core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236 by allowing XEfa light, usually a majority component of X light, emitted by FA segment 216 and passing through FE segment 236 to temporarily pass through core segment 232. FA segment 216 typically reflects XRfa light, usually largely ARfa light. Total XTfa light consists of XEfa light and any XRfa light, usually mostly emitted XEfa light. Segment 216 typically imposes the FA trait on the XEfa light and on at least part of the XRfa light.
104921 The remaining light processing during the changed state in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment is the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment except that the combination of XEfa light and any XRfa light replaces XRfa light Total XTfe light consists of XEfa light passing through FE
segment 236, any XRfa light passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly XEfa light. XTfe light passing through core segment 232 has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214. Total XTcl light consists of XEfa light passing through core segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any XRfe and XRfa light passing through it, usually mostly XEfa light having the changed outgoing trait. Total XTab light consists of XEfa light passing through NE segment 234, any XRfa light passing through it, and any XRab light formed with any ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEfa light.
104931 XTab light passing through NA segment 214 typically has the NA
outgoing trait upon reaching IS
segment 192. Total XTcc light consists of XEfa light passing through NA
segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light passing through it, again usually mostly XEfa light. Including -'113-WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138. XEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X
light.
104941 While the primary outgoing and changed outgoing traits are independent of wavelength, the material difference between them is chosen to result in temporary total core color XTcl differing materially from normal total core color ATcl in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment This often results from the radiosity of the XEfa component in the XTcl light during the changed state differing materially from, usually being materially less than, the radiosity of the AEfa component in the ATcl light during the normal state due to the material difference between the primary outgoing and changed outgoing traits so that the XTcl and Aid light differ materially in radiosity. Color X differs materially from color A.
104951 One embodiment of the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment of CC component 184 is a backlit LC
structure in which core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as nematic liquid crystal formed with elongated LC particles. FA layer 206 contains a light emitter such as a lamp extending parallel to, and along all of, assembly 202 so as to emit light, usually of uniform radiosity, leaving layer 206 along all of assembly 202.
104961 The backlit LC structure is configured the same as the reflective LC
structure of the deep-reflection embodiment except that the light emitter replaces the light reflector. NA
layer 204 again contains a near plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, NE structure 224. FA
layer 206 contains a far plane polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226 so as to lie between structure 226 and the light emitter. The PZ direction of the far polarizer again typically extends perpendicular to, or parallel to, the PZ
direction of the near polarizer but can extend at a non-zero angle materially different from 900 to the PZ direction of the near polarizer. The backlit LC structure with perpendicular polarizers operates the same as the reflective LC structure with perpendicular polarizers except as described below.
104971 The light emitter emits, usually continuously during operation of 01 structure 200, AEfa light that impinges on the far polarizer. With the emitted light consisting of p and s directional components defined relative to the near polarizer so that the PZ direction of the far polarizer extends in the s direction, the far polarizer transmits a high percentage of the s component and blocks, preferably absorbs, the p component.
Emitted AEfa light and any reflected ARfa light passing through the far polarizer so as to strike FE structure 226 and core layer 222 are plane polarized in the s direction. This action occurs during both the normal and changed states with structure 226 and layer 222.
104981 During the normal state, the combination of AEfa light and any ARfa light undergoes the same further processing that ARfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection embodiment. Specifically, the LC material causes incident s polarized AEfa light and any ARfa light to undergo a rotation in PZ direction largely equal to the primary LC amount. The near polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any incident light plane polarized in -'114-largely any direction other than the p direction so that light passing through the near polarizer includes AEfa light and any ARfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
104991 During the changed state, core layer 222 here responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment. The combination of XEfa light and any XRfa light undergoes the same further processing that XRfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection embodiment. More particularly, to the extent that the PZ direction of any incoming p polarized XRna light leaving the near polarizer segment in NA segment 214 undergoes rotation in core segment 232, the LC segment in segment 232 causes incidents polarized XEfa light and any XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction. The near polarizer segment in NA
segment 214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the p direction so that light passing through the near polarizer segment in segment 214 includes XEfa light and any XRfa light plane polarized in the p direction. The radiosity of the p plane polarized XEfa light passing through the near polarizer segment in segment 214 during the changed state differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the p plane polarized AEfa light passing through the near polarizer during the normal state because the radiosity of the s plane polarized XEfa light passing through the far polarizer segment in FA
segment 216 during the changed state differs materially from the radiosity of the s plane polarized AEfa light passing through the far polarizer during the normal state due to the effective PZ direction rotation, if any, provided by core segment 232 during the changed state differing materially from, usually being materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by core layer 222 during the normal state.
105001 Similar to what occurs with colors ARfa and XRfa in the deep-reflection embodiment, colors AEfa and XEfa normally have the same wavelength characteristics. However, the material difference in radiosity between the resultant p plane polarized XEfa light leaving NA segment 214 during the changed state and the resultant p plane polarized AEfa light leaving NA layer 204 during the normal state by itself, or in combination with other reflected light leaving print area 118 during the changed state and SF zone 112 during the normal state enables color X to differ materially from color A. With color XEfa being at materially lower radiosity than color AEfa, color X is again materially lighter than color A even though even though the wavelength characteristics of XEfa and AEfa light are the same.
105011 The mid-emission ET, mid-emission EN-ET, deep-emission ET, and deep-emission EN-ET
embodiments are advantageous because use of light emission to produce changed color X enables print area 118 to be quite bright. Visibility of the color change is enhanced, especially in dark ambient environments where certain colors are difficult to distinguish.
-'115-Object-impact Structure Having Surface Structure for Protection, Pressure Spreading, and/or Velocity Restitution Matching 105021 Figs. 13a - 13c (collectively "Fig. 13") illustrate an extension 240 of 01 structure 130. 01 structure 240 is configured the same as structure 130, e.g., ISCC structure 132 can be embodied as CR or CE material, except that VC region 106 here includes a principal SF structure 242 extending from SF zone 112 to meet ISCC
structure 132 along a flat principal structure-structure interface 244 extending parallel to zone 112. See Fig.
13a. SF structure 242 performs various functions such as protecting ISCC
structure 132 from damage and/or spreading pressure to improve the matching between print area 118 and OC area 116 during impact on zone 112. For either of these functions, structure 242 typically consists largely of insulating material along all of zone 112. Structure 242 may provide velocity restitution matching between SF zones 112 and 114 as discussed below for Figs. 102a and 102b. Structure 242 is usually transparent but may nonetheless strongly influence principal color A or/and changed color X.
105031 Light travels through SF structure 242. ISCC structure 132 here operates the same during the normal state as in 01 structure 130 except that light leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF zone 112 in 01 structure 130 leaves ISCC structure 132 via interface 244 here. The total light, termed ATic light, normally leaving structure 132 consists of ARic light reflected by it, any AEic light emitted by it, and any substructure-reflected ARsb light passing through it.
105041 Substantial parts of the ARic light, any AEic light, and any ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Additionally, structure 242 may normally reflect light, termed ARss light, which leaves it via SF zone 112 after striking zone 112. ARic light and any AEic, ARss, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242, and thus VC region 106, form A light. Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light. ARss light may, however, be a majority component of A light if structure 242 strongly influences principal color A.
105051 SF structure 242 usually absorbs some light. Hence, ATic light reaching SF zone 112 so as to leave VC region 106 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total ATic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132 along interface 244. To the extent that light absorption by SF structure 242 is significantly wavelength dependent, light incident on zone 112 and of wavelength significantly absorbed by structure 242 is considerably attenuated before reaching interface 244. ARic light reflected by ISCC
structure 132 is of comparatively low spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity constituency of incident light absorbed by SF structure 242 because that light does not reach interface 244 so as to be reflected by ISCC
structure 132 and included in the ARic light leaving structure 132. ARic light reaching zone 112 is usually of the same spectral radiosity constituency as the ARic light directly leaving structure 132. If ARic light leaving structure 132 is the same in both 01 structures 130 and 240, the ARic light leaving structure 240 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than ARic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength--'116-WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934 dependent absorption. Insofar as undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of ARic light directly leaving ISCC structure 132.
105061 The circumstances differ somewhat with any AEic light emitted by ISCC structure 132. Any component of AEic light leaving structure 132 at wavelength significantly absorbed by SF structure 242 is considerably attenuated before reaching SF zone 112 due to absorption in structure 242. AEic light reaching zone 112 so as to leave VC region 106 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than the AEic light directly leaving 1SCC structure 132. If AEic light leaving structure 132 is the same in 01 structures 130 and 240. AEic light leaving structure 240 can also be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than AEic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-dependent absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of AEic light directly leaving 1500 structure 132.
105071 Referring to Figs. 13b and 13c, item 252 is the ID segment of SF
structure 242 present in IDVC
portion 138. Print area 118, the upper surface of portion 138, is also the upper surface of surface-structure segment 252 here. "SS" hereafter means surface-structure. Item 254 is the ID
segment of interface 244 present in portion 138. In Figs. 13b and 13c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings, ID IF
segment 254 is shown with extra thick line to clearly identify its exemplary location along interface 244.
105081 The impact of object 104 on OC area 116 creates excess SF pressure along area 116. The excess SF pressure is transmitted through SF structure 242 to interface 244 for producing excess internal pressure along an ID distributed-pressure area 256 of interface 244. "DP" hereafter means distributed-pressure. ID
internal DP IF area 256 is situated opposite, and laterally outwardly conforms to, OC area 116. IF area 256 is usually larger than, and usually extends laterally beyond, OC area 116 as shown in the example of Figs. 13b and 13c and as arises when structure 242 provides pressure spreading. While IF
area 256 can be smaller than OC area 116, this results in print area 118 being even smaller than 00 area 116.
105091 1500 segment 142 responds (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the excess internal pressure along DP IF area 256, specifically IF segment 254, by causing 1DVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X if the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meets the above-described principal basic excess internal pressure criteria here requiring that the excess internal pressure at a point along interface 244 equal or exceed a local TH value in order for the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to temporarily appear as color X or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meeting the excess internal pressure criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by causing portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X. The changed state begins as portion 138 goes to a condition in which XRic light reflected by ISCC segment -'117-WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934 142 and any XEic light emitted by it temporarily leave it along IF segment 254. The total light, termed XTic light, temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 consists of XRic light, any XEic light, and any substructure-reflected XRsb light passing through it.
105101 Substantial parts of the XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light pass through ID SS segment 252. If SF structure 242 reflects ARss light during the normal state, SS
segment 252 reflects ARss light during the changed state. XRic light and any XEic, ARss, and XRsb light leaving segment 252, and thus IDVC portion 138, form X light. XDic light differs materially from A and ADic light Each of XDic light and either XRic or XEic light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of X light. If structure 242 strongly influences A light especially if ARss light is a majority component of A light, ARss light usually has a significant effect on X light.
The contributions of ARss light to A
and X light are chosen so that color X materially differs from color A.
105111 Analogous to what occurs with ATic light, XTic light reaching print area 118 so as to leave 1DVC
portion 138 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total XTic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142 along IF segment 254 due to light absorption by SS segment 252. To the extent that light absorption by segment 252 is significantly wavelength dependent, light incident on area 118 and of wavelength significantly absorbed by segment 252 is considerably attenuated before reaching IF segment 254. XRic light reflected by ISCC segment 142 is of comparatively low spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity constituency of light absorbed by SF
structure 242 because the light absorbed by SS segment 252 does not reach IF
segment 254 so as to be reflected by ISCC segment 142 and included in the XRic light leaving segment 142. XRic light reaching area 118 is usually of the same spectral radiosity constituency as XRic light directly leaving segment 142. If XRic light leaving area 118 is the same in both 01 structures 130 and 240, XRic light leaving area 118 in structure 240 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XRic light leaving area 118 in structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-dependent absorption. Insofar as undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of XRic light directly leaving segment 142.
105121 Analogous to what occurs with AEic light, the circumstances differ somewhat with any XEic light emitted by ISCC segment 142. Any component of XEic light leaving segment 142 at wavelength significantly absorbed by SF structure 242 is considerably attenuated before reaching print area 118 due to absorption in SS
segment 252. XEic light reaching area 118 can thus be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XEic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142. If XEic light leaving area 118 is the same in both 01 structures 130 and 240, XEic light leaving area 118 in structure 240 so as to leave 1DVC portion 138 can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XEic light leaving area 118 so as to leave portion 138 in structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-dependent absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption characteristics WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934 of 01 structure 240 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of XEic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142.
105131 SF structure 242 functions as a color filter for significantly absorbing light of selected wavelength in an embodiment of 01 structure 240 in which structure 242 strongly influences principal SF color A or/and changed SF color X. For this embodiment, total ATic light as it leaves ISCC
structure 132 along interface 244 during the normal state is of wavelength for a color termed principal internal color ATic. Because SF structure 242 significantly absorbs light, ISCC structure 132 is not externally visible along interface 244 as principal internal color ATic during the normal state, Total XTic light as it leaves ISCC segment 142 along IF segment 254 during the changed state is of wavelength for a color termed changed internal color XTic. ISSC segment 142 is not externally visible along IF segment 254 as changed internal color XTic during the changed state.
[05141 A selected one of internal colors ATic and XTic is a principal comparatively light color LP. The remaining one of colors ATic and XTic is a principal comparatively dark color DP darker than light color LP.
Lightness L* of light color LP is usually at least 70, preferably at least 80, more preferably at least 90. Lightness L* of dark color DP is usually no more than 30, preferably no more than 20, more preferably no more than 10. If principal internal color ATic is light color LP, principal SF color A is darker than light color LP due to the light absorption by SF structure 242 while changed SF color X may be darker than dark color DP depending on the characteristics of the light absorption by structure 242 and on the lightness of dark color DP. If changed internal color XTic is light color LP, changed SF color X is darker than light color LP
while principal SF color A may be darker than dark color DP. Importantly, the colors embodying colors A and X
can be significantly varied by changing the light absorption characteristics of structure 242 without changing ISCC structure 132.
105151 Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X occurring in the absence of ARss light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of SF structure 242, specifically the wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARss light, without changing ISCC structure 132. SF
structure 242 thus strongly influences color A or/and color X.
105161 The pressure spreading performable by SF structure 242 enables print area 118 to closely match 00 area 116 in size, shape, and location along SF zone 112. Structure 242 is a principal pressure-spreading structure. "PS" hereafter means pressure-spreading. Interface 244, spaced apart from zone 112 so as to be inside 01 structure 240, is a principal internal PS surface. ISCC structure 132 is a principal pressure-sensitive CC structure because it is sensitive to the excess internal pressure produced by PS structure 242 along PS
surface 244. "PSCC" hereafter means pressure sensitive color-change. ISCC
segment 142 is similarly a PSCC
segment.
105171 For the situation in which IDVC portion 138 temporarily appears as color X if the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meet the excess internal pressure criteria, an understanding of the benefits of pressure spreading on PSCC structure 132 is facilitated by first considering what occurs during an impact in similar 01 structure 130 lacking PS structure 242 in the corresponding situation where portion 138 temporarily appears as color X if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria. With reference to Figs. 6b and 6c respectively corresponding to Figs. 13b and 13c, the impact creates excess SF
pressure along area 116. The TH impact criteria which must be met for 1DVC portion 138 to temporarily appear as color X in response to the impact and which determine the size, shape, and location of print area 118 along SF zone 112 largely become the above-described principal basic excess SF pressure criteria requiring that the excess SF pressure at a point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value in order for that point to be a TH CM point and temporarily appear as color X. Since the excess SF pressure drops to zero along the perimeter of OC area 116, print area 118 is located inside OC area 116 with the perimeters of areas 116 and 118 separated by perimeter band 120 which appears as color A during the changed state because the excess SF
pressure at each point in band 120 is less than the local TH excess SF pressure value for that point.
105181 Perimeter band 120 generally becomes smaller as the TH excess SF
pressure values decrease.
This improves the size, shape, and location matching between OC area 116 and print area 118. However, reducing the TH excess SF pressure values makes it easier for color change to occur along SF zone 112 and can result in undesired color change. The area of band 120 usually cannot be reduced to essentially zero without introducing reliability difficulty into 01 structure 130.
105191 Returning to Figs. 13b and 13c. PS structure 242 laterally spreads the excess SF pressure caused by the impact so that DP IF area 256 is laterally larger than OC area 116. An annular band (not labeled) of internal PS surface 244 extends between the perimeters of IF area 256 and IF
segment 254. This band lies opposite a corresponding annular band (not separately indicated) of SF zone 112. The excess internal pressure along IF area 256 reaches a maximum value within area 256 and drops to zero along its perimeter. This results in the excess internal pressure criteria not being met in the annular band between the perimeters of area 256 and IF segment 254. The corresponding annular band of SF zone 112 appears as color A during the changed state. Because area 256 is laterally larger than oppositely situated OC area 116, the size and shape of the annular band of zone 112 can be adjusted to achieve very close size, shape, and location matching between OC
area 116 and print area 118. In effect, the pressure spreading enables perimeter band 120 between areas 116 and 118 to be made quite small without introducing reliability difficulty into PSCC structure 132. The same arises when 1DVC portion 138 temporarily appears as color X if PSCC segment 142 is provided with the general CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal impact criteria being met and sometimes other impact criteria also being met.
[05201 Print area 118, although shown as being smaller than OC area 116 in Figs. 13b and 13c, can be larger than it in 01 structure 240. The perimeters of areas 116 and 118 in structure 240 can variously cross each other. Print area 118 in structure 240 differs usually by no more than 20%, preferably by no more than 15%, more preferably by no more than 10%, even more preferably by no more than 5%, in area from OC area 116, at least when total OC area 124 is in SF zone 112 as arises in Fig. 13b. In Fig.
13c where area 124 extends WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934 beyond zone 112, the same percentages apply to an imaginary variation of structure 240 in which zone 112 is extended to encompass all of area 124.
105211 Turning to the protective function, SF structure 242 is located between ISCC structure 132 and the external environment. This shields structure 132 from the external environment In particular, protective SF
structure 242 is sufficiently thick to materially protect ISCC structure 132 from being damaged by most matter impacting, lying on, and/or moving along SF zone 112 and thereby serves as a protective structure. Protective structure 242, which may be thicker than ISCC structure 132, materially absorbs the shock of matter, including object 104, impacting zone 112. Part of the force exerted by object 104 dissipates in structure 242 so that the force exerted on DP IF area 256 due to the object impact is less, typically considerably less, than the force exerted by object 104 directly on OC area 116.
105221 SF structure 242 blocks at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, more preferably at least 95%, of UV
radiation striking it. As a result, structure 242 materially protects ISCC
structure 132 from being damaged by UV
radiation. DP IF area 256, which is larger than IF segment 254 when protective structure 242 performs pressure spreading, is usually closer to segment 254 in size if structure 242 performs the protective function but does not (significantly) perform the PS function.
105231 Figs. 14a - 14c (collectively "Fig. 14") illustrate an embodiment 260 of 01 structure 240. 01 structure 260 is also an extension of 01 structure 180 to include SF structure 242. 1SCC structure 132 here is formed with components 182 and 184 configured the same as in 01 structure 180.
See Fig. 14a. SF structure 242, which meets IS component 182 along interface 244, is here configured and operable the same as in 01 structure 240.
105241 1500 structure 132 here operates the same during the normal state as in 01 structure 180 except that light leaving structure 132 via SF zone 112 in 01 structure 180 leaves structure 132 via interface 244 here.
Total ATcc light consists of ARcc light and any AEcc and ARsb light leaving CC
component 184. Total ATic light leaving IS component 182, and thus structure 132, consists of ARcc light passing through component 182, any AEcc and ARsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it.
Substantial parts of the ARcc light and any AEcc, ARis, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including any ARss light reflected by structure 242, A light is formed with ARcc light and any AEcc, ARss, ARis, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and therefore VC region 106.
105251 The changed-state light processing in 1500 segment 142 here is essentially the same as in 01 structure 180 except that light leaving segment 142 via print area 118 in structure 180 leaves segment 142 via IF
segment 254 here. See Figs. 14b and 14c. IS segment 192 provides a principal general impact effect if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria. The general impact effect is specifically provided in response to the excess internal pressure along IF segment 254 meeting the basic excess internal pressure criteria which implement the TH impact criteria. Total XTcc light consists of XRcc light and any XEcc and XRsh light leaving -'121 -CC segment 194 in response (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments.
Total XTic light leaving IS
segment 192, and thus ISCC segment 142, consists of XRcc light passing through segment 192, any XEcc and XRsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it. Substantial parts of the XRcc light and any XEcc, ARis, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252. Including any ARss light reflected by segment 252, X light is formed with XRcc light and any XEcc, ARss, ARis, and XRsb light leaving segment 252 and hence IDVC portion 138.
105261 Figs. 15a - 15c (collectively "Fig. 15"), illustrate an embodiment 270 of 01 structure 260 and thus of 01 structure 240. 01 structure 270 is also an extension of 01 structure 200 to include SF structure 242. See Fig.
15a. ISCC structure 132 here is formed with IS component 182 and CC component 184 consisting of NA layer 204, NE structure 224, core layer 222, FE structure 226, and FA layer 206 configured the same as in 01 structure 200. SF structure 242, which again meets component 182 along interface 244, is here configured and operable the same as in 01 structure 260 and thus the same as in 01 structure 240.
[0527] CC component 184 here operates the same during the normal state as in 01 structure 200. Total ATcc light consists of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light leaving component 184. IS
component 182 here operates the same during the normal state as in structure 200 except that light leaving component 182 via SF zone 112 in structure 200 leaves component 182 via interface 244 here. Total ATic light normally leaving component 182, and thus ISCC structure 132, consists of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light passing through component 182 and any ARis light reflected by it.
105281 Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light pass through SF
structure 242. Including any ARss light normally reflected by structure 242, A
light is formed with any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARss, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving structure 242 and thus VC region 106.
The following normal-state relationships apply here to the extent that the indicated light species are present:
ARab, ARfa, and ARna light form ARcc light; ARab light consists of ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light; AEab and AEfa light form AEcc light; and AEab light consists of AEcl light.
105291 ID segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 of respective subcomponents 204, 224, 222, 226, and 206 are not labeled in Fig. 15b or 15c due to spacing limitations. See Fig.
12b or 12c for identifying segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 in Fig. 15b or 15c. With reference to Figs. 15b and 15c, IS segment 192 again provides a principal general impact effect in response to the excess internal pressure along IF segment 254 meeting the basic excess internal pressure criteria which implement the basic TH impact criteria. The changed-state light processing in CC segment 194 here is then the same as in 01 structure 200. Total XTcc light consists of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 in response (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control DEMANDE OU BREVET VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND
PLUS D'UN TOME.

NOTE : Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des brevets JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE
VOLUME

NOTE: For additional volumes, please contact the Canadian Patent Office NOM DU FICHIER / FILE NAME:
NOTE POUR LE TOME / VOLUME NOTE:

Claims

I CLAIM:

1. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region comprising an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a color-change ("CC") component, wherein:
an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria: and an ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect, if provided, by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

2. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the IS component is situated at least partly between the surface zone and the CC component.

3. An IP structure as in Claim 2 wherein the IS component has a transmissivity of at least 40% at at least one location along the IS component to light incident largely perpendicularly on the surface zone and at at least wavelengths of (a) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the principal color and (b) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the changed color.

4. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the IS component comprises piezoelectric structure, a segment of the piezoelectric structure being in the ID segment of the IS component and, if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, providing the impact effect as at least an electrical effect resulting from pressure of the object impacting the OC area.

5. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the IS component comprises:
piezoelectric structure, a segment of the piezoelectric structure being in the ID segment of the IS
component and, if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, providing an initial electrical effect resulting from pressure of the object impacting the OC area; and effect-modifying structure for modifying the initial electrical effect to produce a modified electrical effect as at least part of the impact effect.

6. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein:
the CC component normally reflects light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color such that the VC region normally appears along the surface zone largely as the principal color: and the ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect, if provided, by temporarily reflecting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

7. An IP structure as in Claim 6 wherein the CC component comprises at least one of the following light-processing structures: dipolar suspension structure, electrochromic structure, electrofluidic structure, electrophoretic structure, electrowetting structure, photonic crystal structure, and reflective liquid-crystal structure.

8. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect, if provided, by temporarily emitting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

9. An IP structure as in Claim 8 wherein the CC component comprises at least one of the following light-processing structures: backlit liquid-crystal structure, cathodoluminescent structure, digital light processing structure, electrochromic fluorescent structure, electrochromic luminescent structure, electrochromic phosphorescent structure, electroluminescent structure, emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem structure, field-emission structure, laser phosphor structure, light-emitting diode structure, light-emitting electrochemical cell structure, liquid-crystal-over-silicon structure, organic light-emitting diode structure, organic light-emitting transistor structure, photoluminescent structure, plasma panel structure, quantum-dot light-emitting diode structure, surface-conduction-emission structure, telescopic pixel structure, and vacuum fluorescent structure.

10. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein (i) each of the principal and changed colors has a lightness L*, a green/red color parameter a*, and a blue/yellow color parameter b* in CIE
L*a*b* color space, (ii) the principal and changed colors have a difference .DELTA.L* in lightness L*, a difference .DELTA.a*
in parameter a*, a difference .DELTA.b* in parameter b*, and a weighted color difference .DELTA.W* equal to (CL.DELTA.L*2 Ca.DELTA.a*2 + Cb.DELTA.b*2)1/2 where CL, Ca, and Cb are non-negative constants, one of constants CL and Ca is greater than constant Cb, and the other of constants CL and Ca is greater than or equal to constant Cb, and (iii) color difference .DELTA.W* is greater than or equal to a threshold weighted difference value .DELTA.Wth* sufficiently high that the principal and changed colors are materially different from each other.

11. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein each of the principal and changed colors has a lightness L* in CIE
L*a*b* color space, the principal and changed colors having a difference in lightness L* of at least 70.

12. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein (i) the object subsequently leaves the surface zone and (ii) a full forward transition delay of the ID portion extends from when the object just completes separation from the OC
area to when the ID portion approximately first appears along the print area largely as the changed color, the full forward transition delay being no more than 0.2 s.

13. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the CC component comprises an electrode assembly comprising (a) near electrode structure, (b) far electrode structure situated generally opposite to, spaced apart from, and situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure, and (c) a core layer situated at least partly between the electrode structures, light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color normally leaving the core layer along the near electrode structure for enabling the VC
region to normally appear along the surface zone largely as the principal color, a CC control signal provided by the VC region in response to the impact effect, if provided, being applied between a location in the near electrode structure and a location in the far electrode structure, at least one of the locations dependent on where the object contacts the surface zone, an ID segment of the core layer responding to the control signal by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color to temporarily leave the ID segment of the core layer along an ID segment of the near electrode structure such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

14. An IP structure as in Claim 13 wherein the near electrode structure comprises graphene-containing material.

15. An IP structure as in Claim 1 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising an IS part of the IS component and a CC part of the CC component, the IS part responding to the impact by providing a cellular impact effect if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria, the CC part of each cell meeting the cellular threshold impact criteria responding to that cell's impact effect by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

16. An IP structure as in Claim 15 wherein the CC part of each cell comprises (a) a near electrode of the near electrode structure, (b) a far electrode of the far electrode structure, the far electrode situated generally opposite to the near electrode, and (c) a core section of the core layer, the core section situated at least partly between the electrodes, light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color normally leaving the core section along the near electrode so as to cause that cell to normally appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color, the IS part providing a cellular impact effect if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a criteria-meeting (CM") cell, a cellular CC voltage being applied between the electrodes of each CM cell in response to its impact effect, the core section of each CM cell responding to its CC voltage by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color to temporarily leave that CM cell along its near electrode so as to enable that CM cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

17. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region comprising an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a color-change ("CC") component, an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS component responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a CC controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC initiation signal, an ID segment of the CC component responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

18. An IP structure as in Claim 17 wherein:
the CC component normally reflects light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color such that the VC region normally appears along the surface zone largely as the principal color; and the ID segment of the CC component responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily reflecting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

19. An IP structure as in Claim 17 wherein the ID segment of the CC component responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily emitting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

20. An IP structure as in Claim 17 wherein (i) the object subsequently leaves the surface zone and (i) a full forward transition delay of the ID portion extends from when the object just completes separation from the OC
area to when the ID portion approximately first appears along the print area largely as the changed color, the full forward transition delay being no more than 0.2 s.

21. An IP structure as in Claim 17 wherein the CC component comprises an electrode assembly comprising (a) near electrode structure, (b) far electrode structure situated generally opposite to, spaced apart from, and situated farther from the surface zone than the near electrode structure, and (c) a core layer situated at least partly between the electrode structures, light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color normally leaving the core layer along the near electrode structure for enabling the VC region to normally appear along the surface zone largely as the principal color; and the CC controller responds to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, by providing a general CC initiation signal that is applied between a location in the near electrode structure and a location in the far electrode structure, at least one of the locations dependent on where the object contacts the surface zone, an ID segment of the core layer responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color to temporarily leave the ID segment of the core layer along an ID segment of the near electrode structure such that the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed color.

22. An IP structure as in Claim 17 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising an IS
part of the IS component and a CC
part of the CC component, the IS part providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing its CC part with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

23. An IP structure as in Claim 22 wherein:
the CC part of each cell comprises (a) a near electrode of the near electrode structure, (b) a far electrode of the far electrode structure, the far electrode situated generally opposite to the near electrode, and (c) a core section of the core layer, the core section situated at least partly between the electrodes, light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color normally leaving the core section along the near electrode so as to cause that cell to normally appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color; and the cellular initiation signal of each full CM cell is applied between its electrodes, the core section of each full CM cell responding to its initiation signal by enabling light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color to temporarily leave that cell along its near electrode so as to enable that CM cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

24. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region extending to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appearing along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region comprising an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a color-change ("CC") component, wherein:
an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing an impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the object subsequently leaving the surface zone; and an ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect, if provided, by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, and at least mostly laterally outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, a 50% forward transition time delay of the ID portion extending from when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID portion has changed 50% from actually appearing along the print area largely as the principal color to actually appearing along the print area largely as the changed color, the 50%
forward transition delay being no more than 0.1 s.

25. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal surface color during the activity, the VC region comprising:
impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure, an ID segment of the ISCC
structure responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID
print area of the surface zone largely as changed surface color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area; and protective structure situated at least partly between the surface zone and the ISCC structure for materially protecting it from being damaged by matter impacting, situated on, and/or moving along the surface zone.

26. An IP structure as in Claim 25 wherein the protective structure has a transmissivity of at least 40% at at least one location along the protective structure to light incident largely perpendicularly on the surface zone and at least wavelengths of (a) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the principal color and (b) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the changed color.

27. An IP structure as in Claim 25 wherein the protective structure blocks at least 80% of ultraviolet radiation incident on the protective structure from outside the OI structure.

28. An IP structure as in Claim 25 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising:
an ISCC part of the ISCC structure, the ISCC part causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria; and a protective part of the protective structure.

29. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal surface color during the activity, the VC region comprising:
principal impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure, an ID segment of the ISCC structure responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed surface color materially different from the principal surface color if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area; and principal surface structure situated between the surface zone and a principal interface with the ISCC
structure, total light normally leaving the ISCC structure along the interface being of wavelength suitable for forming a principal internal color, total light temporarily leaving an ID
segment of the interface spanning the ID
portion along the interface while the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as the changed surface color being of wavelength suitable for forming a changed internal color, a selected one of the internal colors being a principal comparatively light color, the remaining one of the internal colors being a principal comparatively dark color darker than the light color, the surface structure absorbing light leaving the ISCC
structure along the interface such that the principal surface color is darker than the light color if the principal internal color is the light color and such that the changed surface color is darker than the light color if the changed internal color is the light color.

30. An IP structure as in Claim 29 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal surface color during the activity, each cell comprising:
an ISCC part of the ISCC structure, the ISCC part causing that cell to appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed surface color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria; and a surface-structure part of the surface structure.

31. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region comprising (a) impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure and (b) protective structure situated at least partly between the surface zone and the ISCC structure for materially protecting it from being damaged by matter impacting, situated on, and/or moving along the surface zone, an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the ISCC structure responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID
object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID
print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC

initiation signal, the ID segment of the ISCC structure responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

32. An IP structure as in Claim 31 wherein the protective structure has a transmissivity of at least 40% at at least one location along the protective structure to light incident largely perpendicularly on the surface zone and at at least wavelengths of (a) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the principal color and (b) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the changed color.

33. An IP structure as in Claim 31 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising (a) an ISCC part of the ISCC structure and (b) a protective part of the protective structure, the ISCC part providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM
cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing its ISCC part with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

34. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region comprising:
pressure-sensitive color-change ("PSCC") structure; and pressure-spreading structure situated at least partly between the surface zone and the PSCC structure and having a pressure-spreading surface spaced apart from the surface zone, the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the pressure-spreading structure laterally spreading pressure of the impact along an ID distributed-pressure area of the pressure-spreading surface, the distributed-pressure area laterally outwardly conforming largely to, being laterally larger than, and being laterally largely concentric with the OC area, an ID segment of the PSCC
structure responding to excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area meets excess internal pressure criteria, excess internal pressure being pressure in excess of normal internal pressure, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

35. An IP structure as in Claim 34 wherein the print area differs no more than 20% in area from the OC area at least if total ID area spanning where the object contacts the exposed surface during the impact is in the surface zone.

36. An IP structure as in Claim 34 wherein the pressure-spreading structure has a transmissivity of at least 40%
at at least one location along the pressure-spreading structure to light incident largely perpendicularly on the surface zone and at at least wavelengths of (a) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the principal color and (b) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the changed color.

37. An IP structure as in Claim 34 wherein the pressure-spreading structure blocks at least 80% of ultraviolet radiation incident on the pressure-spreading structure from outside the OI
structure.

38. An IP structure as in Claim 34 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising:
a pressure-spreading part of the pressure-spreading structure, the pressure-spreading part having a surface constituted with a part of the pressure-spreading surface; and a PSCC part of the PSCC structure, the PSCC part causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if any excess internal pressure along its part of the pressure-spreading surface meets cellular excess internal pressure criteria.

39. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a color during the activity, the VC region comprising (a) pressure-sensitive color-change ("PSCC") structure and (b) pressure-spreading structure situated at least partly between the surface zone and the PSCC structure and having a pressure-spreading surface spaced apart from the surface zone, the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone, the pressure-spreading structure laterally spreading pressure of the impact along an ID distributed-pressure area of the pressure-spreading surface, the distributed-pressure area laterally outwardly conforming largely to, being laterally larger than, and being laterally largely concentric with the OC area, an ID segment of the PSCC structure responding to excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure area meets excess internal pressure criteria, excess internal pressure being pressure in excess of normal internal pressure, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID
print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal, the ID segment of the PSCC structure responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

40. An IP structure as in Claim 39 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising (a) a pressure-spreading part of the pressure-spreading structure, the pressure-spreading part having a surface constituted with a part of the pressure-spreading surface, and (b) a PSCC part of the PSCC structure, the PSCC part providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing its PSCC
part with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

41. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity. the VC region comprising principal impact-sensitive color-change ("ISCC") structure and principal duration-extension ("DE") structure wherein:

an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the ISCC structure responds to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("QC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone so as to cause deformation along an ID surface deformation area of the surface zone by causing an ID portion of the VC region to temporarily appear along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the CC area, the ID portion subsequently returning to appearing along the print area largely as the principal color; and the DE structure responds to the object impacting the OC area by causing the ISCC structure to deform along an ID internal deformation area, spaced apart from the surface deformation area, so that the ID segment of the ISCC structure causes the ID portion to further temporarily appear along the print area largely as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, thereby extending color-change ("CC") duration of the ID portion temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the changed color.

42. An IP structure as in Claim 41 wherein the CC duration is a duration .DELTA.t dr determined approximately as:
.DELTA.t dr= t l50 t f50 + J pmax(1/S f - 1/Sr)/2 where J pmax is the maximum value of a radiosity parameter J p that varies between zero when the ID portion appears along the print area largely as the principal color to maximum value J
pmax when the ID portion appears along the print area largely as the changed color, t f50 is the time at which radiosity parameter J p reaches 50% of maximum value J pmax as the ID portion changes from appearing along the print area largely as the principal color to appearing along the print area largely as the changed color, t r50 is the time at which radiosity parameter J p reaches 50% of maximum value pmax as the ID portion changes from appearing along the print area largely as the changed color to returning to appear along the print area largely as the principal color, S f is the time rate of change of radiosity parameter J p at time t f50, and S r is the time rate of change of radiosity parameter Jp at time tr50

43. An IP structure as in Claim 41 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising:
an ISCC part of the ISCC structure, the ISCC part deforming along a cellular surface deformation area of that cell's part of the surface zone so as to cause that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria, that cell subsequently returning to appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color; and a duration-extension part of the DE structure, the duration-extension part deforming along a cellular internal deformation area, spaced apart from the cellular surface deformation area, so as to cause that cell to further temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet the cellular threshold impact criteria, thereby extending CC
duration of that cell changing from starting to appear along its part of the surface zone materially different from the principal color to returning to appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color.

44. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ('OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria such that the ID portion temporarily appears along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the OC
area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

45. An IP structure as in Claim 44 wherein the VC region comprises piezoluminescent material or/and piezochromic luminescent material.

46. An IP structure as in Claim 44 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color so as to cause that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

47. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("lD") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact: and a color-change ("CC") controller responds to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the general supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, by providing a general CC initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily emitting light suitable for forming color different from the principal color such that the ID
portion temporarily appears along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

48. An IP structure as in Claim 45 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

49. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone, the VC region comprising a multiplicity of VC
cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as a principal color during the activity, each cell that meets cellular threshold impact criteria in response to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone temporarily becoming a criteria-meeting ("CM") cell and temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape.

50. An IP structure as in Claim 49 wherein each cell comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") part and a color-change ("CC") part, the IS part of each CM cell responding to the impact by providing a cellular impact effect, the CC part of each CM cell responding to its impact effect by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

51. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the IS part of each cell is situated at least partly between its part of the surface zone and its CC part, the IS part of each cell having a transmissivity of at least 40% at at least one location along the IS part of that cell to light incident largely perpendicularly on the surface zone and at at least wavelengths of (a) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the principal color and (b) at least a majority component of light suitable for forming the changed color.

52. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the IS part of each cell comprises piezoelectric structure, the IS part of each CM cell providing its impact effect as at least a cellular electrical effect resulting from pressure of the object impacting the OC area.

53. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the lS part of each cell comprises piezoelectric structure and effect-modifying structure, the piezoelectric structure of each CM cell providing an initial cellular electrical effect resulting from pressure of the object impacting the OC area, the effect-modifying structure of each CM cell modifying its initial electrical effect to produce a modified cellular electrical effect as at least part of its impact effect.

54. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the CC part of each cell normally reflects light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color so as to cause that cell to normally appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color, the CC part of each CM cell responding to its impact effect by temporarily reflecting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color so as to cause that CM cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

55. An IP structure as in Claim 54 wherein the CC part of each cell comprises one of the following light-processing structures: dipolar suspension structure, electrochromic structure, electrofluidic structure, electrophoretic structure, electrowetting structure, photonic crystal structure, and reflective liquid-crystal structure.

56. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the CC part of each CM cell responds to its impact effect by temporarily emitting light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color so as to cause that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

57. An IP structure as in Claim 56 wherein the CC part of each cell comprises one of the following light-processing structures: backlit liquid-crystal structure, cathodoluminescent structure, digital light processing structure, electrochromic fluorescent structure, electrochromic luminescent structure, electrochromic phosphorescent structure, electroluminescent structure, emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem structure, field-emission structure, laser phosphor structure, light-emitting diode structure, light-emitting electrochemical cell structure, liquid-crystal-over-silicon structure, organic light-emitting diode structure, organic light-emitting transistor structure, photoluminescent structure, plasma panel structure, quantum-dot light-emitting diode structure, surface-conduction-emission structure, telescopic pixel structure, and vacuum fluorescent structure.

58. An IP structure as in Claim 50 wherein the CC part of each cell comprises (a) a near electrode, (b) a far electrode situated generally opposite to, spaced apart from, and situated farther from that cell's part of the surface zone than, the near electrode, and (c) a core section situated at least partly between the electrodes, light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming the principal color normally leaving the core section along the near electrode so as to enable that cell to normally appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color, a cellular CC voltage being applied between the electrodes of each CM cell in response to its impact effect, the core section of each CM cell responding to its CC voltage by causing light having at least a majority component of wavelength suitable for forming color different from the principal color to temporarily leave that CM cell along its near electrode so as to enable that CM cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

59. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone, the VC region comprising a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as a principal color during the activity, each cell that meets cellular threshold impact criteria in response to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone temporarily becoming a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, each threshold CM cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal that identifies cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal of each threshold CM cell for combining the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM
cell with the cellular supplemental impact information of any other threshold CM cell to form general supplemental impact information, for determining whether the general supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria, and, if so, for providing a cellular CC initiation signal to each threshold CM cell so as to cause it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color.

60. An IP structure as in Claim 59 wherein each cell comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") part and a CC part, the IS part of each threshold CM cell providing its cellular impact signal, the CC part of each full CM cell responding to its initiation signal by causing that full CM cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

61. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along the surface zone largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, the ID portion subsequently returning to appearing along the print area largely as the principal color, color-change ("CC") time duration of the ID portion changing from starting to appear along the print area materially different from the principal color to returning to appear along the print area largely as the principal color being, absent externally caused adjustment, substantially in a principal CC time duration range established prior to the impact; and a CC controller responsive to both the impact and subsequent external instruction for controlling the ID
portion so as to adjust the CC duration subsequent to the impact.

62. An IP structure as in Claim 61 wherein the instruction is manually provided, directly or remotely, to the controller.

63. An IP structure as in Claim 61 wherein the instruction is provided, directly or remotely, by human voice to the controller.

64. An IP structure as in Claim 61 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell that meets cellular threshold impact criteria in response to the object impacting the OC area temporarily becoming a criteria-meeting ("CM") cell which temporarily appears along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color and which subsequently returns to appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the principal color, CC time duration of each CM cell temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color being, absent externally caused adjustment, substantially in the CC duration range; and the controller responds to both the impact and the external instruction by controlling each CM cell so as to adjust its CC duration subsequent to the object impacting the OC area.

65. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a principal general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a principal general CC initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

66. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein the supplementary impact criteria include size and/or shape criteria for the print area.

67. An IP structure as in Claim 66 wherein the size criteria include a maximum reference area value for the print area whereby the controller provides the initiation signal substantially only when the print area is expected to be of an area less than or equal to the maximum reference area value.

68. An IP structure as in Claim 66 wherein the size criteria include a minimum reference area value for the print area if it is located substantially fully in the surface zone whereby the controller provides the initiation signal when the print area is expected to be of an area greater than or equal to the minimum reference area value if the print area is expected to be located substantially fully in the surface zone.

69. An IP structure as in Claim 66 wherein the shape criteria include (a) a reference shape for the print area and (b) a shape parameter set consisting of at least one shape parameter defining variations from the reference shape whereby the controller provides the initiation signal substantially only when the print area has a shape expected to fall within the shape parameter set.

70. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein (a) the supplemental impact information includes time duration of the object in contact with the OC area and (b) the supplementary impact criteria include OC time duration criteria.

71. An IP structure as in Claim 70 wherein the OC duration criteria include a maximum reference duration value whereby the controller provides the initiation signal substantially only when duration of the object in contact with the OC area is less than or equal to the maximum reference OC duration value.

72. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein:
the ID portion subsequently returns to appearing along the print area largely as the principal color; and the controller also responds to external instruction by providing the ID
portion with a CC time duration signal for controlling CC duration of the ID portion changing from starting to appear along the print area materially different from the principal color to returning to appear along the print area largely as the principal color if the supplementary impact information meets the supplementary impact criteria.

73. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein the controller is operable to selectively activate and deactivate, at selected times, each of two or more different variable-color ("VC") parcels of a variable-color ("VC") structure comprising the VC region, each VC parcel potentially including at least one portion of the VC structure present in at least one other VC parcel provided that each VC parcel consists of material of the VC structure different from each other VC parcel.

74. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein the controller generates an audible sound in response to the impact signal, if provided, if the supplementary impact information meets the principal supplementary impact criteria, the sound indicating that the object has impacted the surface zone so as to produce the print area

75. An IP structure as in Claim 65 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplementary impact information of the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the supplementary impact information comprising the cellular supplementary impact information of that threshold CM
cell and any other threshold CM
cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the supplementary impact information meets the supplementary impact criteria.

76. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along the surface zone largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("'OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area;
image-generating ("IG") structure for generating images: and an IG controller responsive to the object impacting the OC area for causing the IG structure to generate a principal print-area vicinity ("PAV") image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent surface extending to at least a selected location of the exposed surface if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.

77. An IP structure as in Claim 76 wherein the IG controller automatically causes the IG structure to generate the PAV image if a point in the print area is less than or equal to a selected distance away from, including in, the selected location.

78. An IP structure as in Claim 76 wherein the IG controller responds to external instruction by causing the IG
structure to generate the PAV image if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.

79. An IP structure as in Claim 76 wherein:
the surface zone has a boundary;
the print area has a print area perimeter:
the IP structure provides an approximation capability for (a) determining a portion of the boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion thereof nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication of the comparison.

80. An IP structure as in Claim 79 wherein the IG structure generates an image containing the curves.

81. An IP structure as in Claim 76 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

82. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along the surface zone largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a principal general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID
print area in the surface zone and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact;
a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a principal general CC initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area;
image-generating ("IG") structure for generating images; and an IG controller responsive to the initiation signal, if provided, for causing the IG structure to generate a principal PAV image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent surface extending to at least a selected location of the exposed surface if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria.

83. An IP structure as in Claim 82 wherein the CC controller generates an audible sound in response to the impact signal, if provided, if the supplemental impact information meets the principal supplemental impact criteria, the sound indicating that the object has impacted the surface zone so as to produce the print area.

84. An IP structure as in Claim 82 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplementary impact information of the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the supplementary impact information comprising the cellular supplementary impact information of that threshold CM
cell and any other threshold CM
cell; and the CC controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the supplementary impact information meets the supplementary impact criteria.

85. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region being capable of being enabled for, and normally disabled from, being capable of changing color; and object-tracking control apparatus for tacking movement of the object over the exposed surface, for estimating where the object is expected to impact the exposed surface according to the tracked movement, and for providing a color-change ("CC") enable signal shortly prior to the object impacting the exposed surface if the tracked movement indicates that the object is expected to contact the exposed surface at least partly in the surface zone, the CC enable signal at least partly identifying estimated object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object is so expected to contact the surface zone, an oversize portion of the VC region extending to an oversize area of the surface zone being temporarily enabled in response to the CC enable signal so as to be capable of changing color, the oversize area encompassing and extending beyond the estimated OC area, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region included in its oversize portion responding to the object impacting the oversize area at an ID actual OC area spanning where the object actually contacts the oversize area by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the actual OC
area.

86. An IP structure as in Claim 85 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC
enablable/disablable cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity arid ordinarily being disabled from being capable of changing color, the oversize portion of the VC region constituted with an ID group of the cells, each cell in the ID group being enabled in response to the CC enable signal to be capable of changing color so as to temporarily appear along that cell's part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

87. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to largely joint occurrence of an impact tracking signal and the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, the object subsequently leaving the surface zone; and object-tracking control apparatus for tracking movement of the object over the exposed surface and for providing the tracking signal during at least part of a tracking contact time period extending substantially from when the object impacts the surface zone to when the object leaves the surface zone according to the tracked movement, the tracking signal thereby indicating that the object impacted the surface zone.

88. An IP structure as in Claim 87 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, the ID portion being constituted with an ID group of the cells, each cell in the ID group responding to largely joint occurrence of the tracking signal and the impact by temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

89. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the LI
impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone; and object-tracking control apparatus for tracking movement of the object over the exposed surface, for estimating where the object contacted the exposed surface according to the tracked movement, for providing an estimation impact signal indicating estimated OC area spanning where the object is so estimated to have contacted the surface zone if the estimate of that contact with the exposed surface is at least partly in the surface zone, for comparing the LI and estimation impact signals, and for providing a color-change ("CC") initiation signal if comparison of the LI and estimation impact signals indicates that the print area and the estimated OC area at least partly overlap, the ID portion responding to the CC
initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

90. An IP structure as in Claim 89 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each of multiple cells for which the impact of the object on that cell's part of the surface zone meets cellular threshold impact criteria being part of a first ID group of the cells and providing a cellular LI impact signal identifying where that cell's part of the surface zone is located in the surface zone, the general LI impact signal comprising the cellular LI impact signals, the parts of the surface zone for the first group of cells forming area expected for the print area, the estimated OC
area comprising parts of the surface zone for a second ID group of the cells, the object-tracking apparatus determining whether any cell is in both groups of cells and, if so, providing each cell in the first group of cells with the initiation signal for causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

91. An IP structure as in Claim 85, 87, or 89 wherein the object-tracking apparatus comprises image-generating structure for generating images of the object as it is moves over the exposed surface.

92. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a location-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID
print area in the surface zone, the print area meeting one of a plurality of mutually exclusive location criteria for the location of the print area in the surface zone, the location criteria encompassing substantially all the surface zone and respectively corresponding to a like plurality of specific changed colors materially different from the principal color, more than one of the specific changed colors being different;
and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining which location criterion is met by the print area and for providing a general CC
initiation signal at a condition corresponding to that location criterion, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the specific changed color for that location criterion, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

93. An IP structure as in Claim 92 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular location-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying where that threshold CM cell's part of the surface zone is located in the surface zone; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the specific changed color for the location criterion met by the print area.

94. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for that impact, the print area meeting one of a plurality of mutually exclusive location criteria for the location of the print area in the surface zone, the location criteria encompassing substantially all the surface zone and respectively corresponding to a like plurality of specific changed colors materially different from the principal color, more than one of the specific changed colors being different; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria, and, if so, for determining which location criterion is met by the print area and providing a general CC
initiation signal at a condition corresponding to that location criterion, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the specific changed color for that location criterion, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

95. An IP structure as in Claim 94 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the specific changed color for the location criterion met by the print area if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

96. An IP structure as in Claim 92 or 94 wherein the surface zone has a perimeter consisting of multiple perimeter segments, the location criteria consisting of (i) a first criterion that the print area adjoin a specified one of the perimeter segments and (ii) a second criterion that the print area be spaced apart from the specified perimeter segment.

97. An IP structure as in Claim 92 or 94 wherein the surface zone has a perimeter, the location criteria consisting of (i) a first criterion that the print area adjoin the perimeter and (ii) a second criterion that the print area be entirely inside the surface zone.

98. An IP structure as in Claim 92 or 94 wherein the 01 structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface comprises an in-bounds ("IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area surrounding the IB area, the IB area having (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly the IB area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, a tennis net situated above an imaginary or real net line located substantially midway between the baselines and extending lengthwise between and beyond the sidelines, the object being a tennis ball, the sidelines and the baselines insofar as they extend between the sidelines constituting a closed boundary line, the surface zone comprising VC
OB area which comprises two VC
OB area portions partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively largely adjoining the baselines along largely their entire lengths between the sidelines, the location criteria consisting of (i) a first criterion that the print area adjoin the boundary line and (ii) a second criterion that the print area be spaced apart from the boundary line.

99. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC
area wherein:
the threshold impact criteria comprise multiple sets of different threshold impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color, more than one of the specific changed colors being different; and the impact is potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets and, if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set met by the impact.

100. An IP structure as in Claim 99 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC
cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, the criteria sets being implemented with cellular threshold impact criteria comprising multiple sets of different cellular threshold impact criteria respectively associated with the specific changed colors, each cell that meets the cellular threshold impact criteria temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the specific changed color for the set of cellular threshold impact criteria met by the impact.

101. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC
area wherein:

(a) the supplemental impact criteria comprise multiple sets of different supplemental impact criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the principal color, more than one of the specific changed colors being different; and (b) the supplemental impact information is potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets and, if the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific changed color for the criteria set met by the supplemental impact information.

102. An IP structure as in Claim 101 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds, if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the specific changed color for the criteria set met by the general supplemental impact information.

103. An IP structure as in Claim 99 or 101 wherein the OI structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface comprises an in-bounds ("IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area surrounding the IB area, the IB area having (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly the IB area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, a tennis net situated above an imaginary or real net line located substantially midway between the baselines and extending lengthwise between and beyond the sidelines into the OB area, the surface zone comprising VC OB area which comprises two VC OB area portions adjoining the IB area and partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line.

104. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area; and sound-generating apparatus for selectively generating a specified audible sound in response to the object impacting the OC area so as to meet the threshold impact criteria, the specified sound being separate from any audible sound originating at the OC area due physically to the impact.

105. An IP structure as in Claim 104 wherein (a) the ID portion provides an impact signal in response to the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria and (b) the sound-generating apparatus generates the specified sound in response to the impact signal, if provided.

106. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact of the object on the OC area meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area; and sound-generating apparatus responsive to the object impacting the OC area so as to meet the threshold impact criteria for selectively generating a specified audible sound or substantially no audible sound, the threshold impact criteria comprising multiple sets of different threshold impact criteria respectively associated with multiple sound candidates, each being substantially no audible sound or a selected audible sound different from at least one other selected audible sound, the impact being potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets, the specified sound or substantially no audible sound being the sound candidate for the criteria set met by the impact and being separate from any audible sound originating at the OC area due physically to the impact.

107. An IP structure as in Claim 106 wherein (a) the ID portion provides an impact signal in response to the impact if it meets at least one set of the threshold impact criteria and (b) the sound-generating apparatus selectively generates the specified sound or substantially no audible sound in response to the impact signal dependent on each set of the threshold impact criteria met by the impact.

108. An IP structure as in Claim 104 or 106 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

109. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for selectively generating a specified audible sound and for providing a general CC initiation signal, the specified sound being separate from any audible sound originating at the OC area due physically to the impact, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

110. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact of the object on the surface zone meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal and selectively generating a specified audible sound or substantially no audible sound, the ID
portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area wherein:
(a) the supplemental impact criteria comprise multiple sets of different supplemental impact criteria respectively associated with multiple sound candidates, each sound candidate being either substantially no audible sound or a selected audible sound different from at least one other selected audible sound; and (b) the supplemental impact information is potentially capable of meeting any of the criteria sets and, if the supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, the specified sound or substantially no audible sound is the sound candidate for the criteria set actually met by the supplemental impact information and is also separate from any audible sound originating at the OC
area due physically to the impact.

111. An IP structure as in Claim 109 or 110 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

112. An IP structure as in Claim 109 or 110 wherein the OI structure functions as a tennis court in which the exposed surface comprises an in-bounds playing area and an out-of-bounds playing area surrounding the in-bounds area, the object being a tennis ball, the CC controller generating the specified sound as a sound indicating that the tennis ball is "out" when the ball impacts a selected portion of the exposed surface where the ball is "out" without simultaneously impacting a selected portion of the exposed surface where the ball is "in", the portion of the exposed surface where the ball is "out" implementing the surface zone.

113. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI
structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") of the VC
region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, the principal and changed colors also differing materially as generally viewed by persons having color vision deficiencies comprising dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy.

114. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("01") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the 01 structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the OC area being capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, a selected one of the principal and changed colors restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum.

115. An IP structure as in Claim 114 wherein the remaining one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from violet to yellow in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from violet to yellow in the visible light spectrum,

116, An IP structure as in Claim 113 or 114 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily appearing along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

117. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("01") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the 01 structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal, the VC region responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC

area, the principal and changed colors also differing materially as generally viewed by persons having color vision deficiencies comprising dichromacy and anomalous tichromacy.

118. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") potion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact of the object on the surface zone meets threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area, a selected one of the principal and changed colors restricted from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum.

119. An IP structure as in Claim 118 wherein the remaining one of the principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from violet to yellow in the light spectrum or any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from violet to yellow in the light spectrum.

120. An IP structure as in Claim 117 or 118 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporality appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

121. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a tennis-playing structure which comprises a tennis net and an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object wherein:
the surface comprises an in-bounds ('IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ('OB") playing area surrounding the IB area, the IB area having (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly the IB area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, an imaginary or real net line located substantially midway between the baselines and extending lengthwise between and beyond the sidelines, the net situated above the net line so as to extend fully across the IB area and into the OB area, a backcourt of the IB area defined inwardly by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts, four servicecourts of the IB area defined inwardly by the sidelines, the servicelines, the centerline, and the net line;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") line-adjoining ("LA") backcourt ("BC") structure portions extending to the surface respectively at two LA BC area portions respectively partly occupying the backcourts and respectively largely adjoining the servicelines, each LA BC
structure portion normally appearing along its LA BC area portion as a principal BC color, (b) four VC LA
servicecourt ("SC") structure portions extending to the surface respectively at four LA SC area portions respectively partly occupying the servicecourts and largely adjoining the centerline, each LA SC structure portion normally appearing along its LA SC area portion as a principal SC color, and/or (c) two VC OB LA structure portions extending to the surface respectively at two OB LA area portions partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively largely adjoining the baselines, each OB LA structure portion normally appearing along its OB LA area portion as a principal OB color; and each LA structure portion in the OI structure comprises a principal impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a principal color-change ("CC") component, an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS component responding to the object impacting the LA area portion of that LA structure portion at an ID object-contact ('OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area portion by providing a principal impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure portion, an ID segment of the CC component responding to the impact effect, if provided, by causing an ID portion of that LA structure portion to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area portion largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color of that LA structure portion, the print area of that LA area portion at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC
area.

122. An IP structure as in Claim 121 wherein each LA structure portion in the OI structure is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the LA area portion of that LA structure portion, the cells normally appearing along their parts of that LA area portion largely as the principal color of that LA structure portion, each cell comprising an IS part of the IS component of that LA
structure portion and a CC part of the CC component of that LA structure portion, the IS part responding to the object impacting that cell's part of that LA area portion by providing a cellular impact effect if that impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria, the CC part responding to that cell's impact effect, if provided, by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color of that LA structure portion.

123. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a color-change (CC") controller and a tennis-playing structure which comprises a tennis net and an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object wherein:
the surface comprises an in-bounds ("IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area surrounding the IB area, the IB area having (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly the IB area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, an imaginary or real net line situated substantially midway between the baselines and extending lengthwise between and beyond the sidelines, the net situated above the net line so as to extend fully across the IB area and into the OB area, a backcourt of the 1B area defined inwardly by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts, four servicecourts of the IB area defined inwardly by the sidelines, the servicelines, the centerline, and the net line;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") line-adjoining ("LA") backcourt ("BC") structure portions extending to the surface respectively at two LA BC area portions respectively partly occupying the backcourts and respectively largely adjoining the servicelines, each LA BC
structure portion normally appearing along its LA BC area portion as a principal BC color, (b) four VC LA
servicecourt ("SC") structure portions extending to the surface respectively at four LA SC area portions respectively partly occupying the servicecourts and largely adjoining the centerline, each LA SC structure portion normally appearing along its LA SC area portion as a principal SC color, and/or (c) two VC OB LA structure portions extending to the surface respectively at two OB LA area portions partly occupying the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively largely adjoining the baselines, each OB LA structure portion normally appearing along its OB LA area portion as a principal OB color; and an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of each LA structure portion in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the LA area portion of that LA structure portion at an ID
object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area portion by providing a principal characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure portion, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area portion and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact, the controller responding to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria for that LA
structure portion and, if so, by providing a principal CC initiation signal, an ID portion of that LA structure portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area of that LA
area portion largely as generic changed color materially different from the principal color of that LA
structure portion, the print area of that LA
area portion at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

124. An IP structure as in Claim 123 wherein each LA structure portion in the OI structure comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a CC component, an ID segment of the IS
component responding to the object impacting the OC area of the LA area portion of that LA structure portion by providing the impact signal for that LA structure portion if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria of that LA structure portion, an ID segment of the CC component responding to the initiation signal, if provided, for that LA structure portion by causing its ID
portion to temporarily appear along the print area of that LA area portion largely as the changed color of that LA
structure portion.

125. An IP structure as in Claim 123 wherein the object comprises a tennis ball, the supplemental impact criteria for the LA structure portions being characteristic of a tennis ball impacting the surface,

126. An IP structure as in Claim 125 wherein the supplemental impact criteria for the LA structure portions include size and/or shape criteria for each print area as impacted by a tennis ball.

127. An IP structure as in Claim 125 wherein (a) the supplemental impact information for each impact includes duration of a tennis ball in contact with each OC area and (b) the supplemental impact criteria for the LA
structure portions include OC duration criteria for a tennis ball impacting each LA area portion.

128. An IP structure as in Claim 123 wherein each LA structure portion in the OI structure is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the LA area portion of that LA structure portion, the cells normally appearing along their parts of that LA area portion largely as the principal color of that LA structure portion, each of multiple cells that meet cellular threshold impact criteria of that LA structure portion in response to the object impacting the OC area of that LA area portion temporarily becoming a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, each threshold CM cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying that identifies cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting that CC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the controller responding to the cellular impact signals by combining the cellular supplemental impact information of the threshold CM
cells to form the general supplemental impact information for that LA structure portion and, if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure portion, by providing a cellular CC initiation signal to each threshold CM cell so as to cause it to temporarily become a full CM cell and temporarily appear along its part of that LA area portion largely as the changed color of that LA structure portion.

129. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a sports-playing structure which comprises an object-impact ('OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:
the surface comprises (a) an in-bounds CIB") area defined by a closed boundary and (b) an out-of-bounds ('OB") area surrounding the IB area and adjoining it along the closed boundary, a finite-width closed boundary line extending fully along the closed boundary and having opposite inside and outside edges of which one is situated in one of the IB and OB areas and the other meets the other of the IB and OB areas;
the OI structure comprises (a) variable-color ("VC") inside-edge boundary-vicinity ("BV") line-adjoining ("LA") structure extending to the surface at VC inside-edge BV LA area situated in the IB area and largely adjoining the inside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length or/and (b) VC outside-edge BV LA
structure extending to the surface at VC outside-edge BV LA area situated in the OB area and largely adjoining the outside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length, each LA structure normally appearing along its LA area as a normal-state BV LA color if that LA structure is in the 01 structure; and each BV LA structure in the OI structure comprises a principal impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a principal color-change ("CC") component, an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS component responding to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area by providing a principal impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, an ID segment of the CC component responding to the impact effect, if provided, by causing an ID portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area largely as generic changed-state BV LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA structure, the print area of that LA area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

130. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a color-change ("CC") controller and a sports-playing structure which comprises an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:
the surface comprises (a) an in-bounds ("IB") area defined by a closed boundary and (b) an out-of-bounds ("OB") area surrounding the IB area and adjoining it along the closed boundary, a finite-width closed boundary line extending fully along the closed boundary and having opposite inside and outside edges of which one is situated in one of the IB and OB areas and the other meets the other of the IB and OB areas;
the OI structure comprises (a) variable-color ("VC") inside-edge boundary-vicinity ("BV") line-adjoining ("LA") structure extending to the surface at VC inside-edge BV LA area situated in the IB area and largely adjoining the inside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length or/and (b) VC outside-edge BV LA
structure extending to the surface at VC outside-edge BV LA area situated in the OB area and largely adjoining the outside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length, each BV LA structure normally appearing along its LA area as a normal-state BV LA color if that LA structure is in the 01 structure; and an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of each BV LA structure in the OI structure responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID object-contact ('OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area by providing a principal characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact, the controller responding to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure and, if so, by providing a principal CC initiation signal, the ID portion of that LA structure responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area largely as generic changed-state BV LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA structure, the print area of that LA area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

131. An IP structure as in Claim 130 wherein each BV LA structure in the OI
structure comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a CC component, an ID segment of the IS
component responding to the object impacting the OC area of the LA area of that LA structure by providing the impact signal for that LA structure if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, an ID
segment of the CC component responding to the initiation signal, if provided, for that LA structure by causing its ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area of that LA area largely as the changed-state LA color of that LA structure.

132. An IP structure as in Claim 130 wherein the print area of the LA area of each BV LA structure in the OI
structure meets one of two mutually exclusive location criteria for the location of tat print area in that LA area, the location criteria consisting of (i) a first criterion that that print area adjoin the boundary line and (ii) a second criterion that that print area be spaced apart from the boundary line, the generic changed-state LA color of that LA area being implementable with different first and second specific changed-state LA colors respectively corresponding to the first and second location criteria for that LA area, the controller responding to the impact signal, if provided, for that LA structure by determining which location criterion for that LA area is met by that print area and, if the supplemental impact information for the impact on that LA area meets the supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure, by providing its initiation signal at a condition corresponding to that location criterion, the ID portion of that LA structure responding to that initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along that print area largely as the specific changed-state LA color for that location criterion.

133. An IP structure as in Claim 129 or 130 wherein (a) the outside-edge BV LA
structure is in the OI structure if the boundary line is in the 1B area and (b) the inside-edge BV LA structure is in the OI structure if the boundary line is in the OB area.

134. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a sports-playing structure which comprises an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:
the surface comprises (a) an in-bounds ("IB") area defined by a closed boundary and (b) an out-of-bounds ("OB") area surrounding the IB area and adjoining it along the closed boundary, a closed boundary line extending along the closed boundary, the IB area having at least one finite-width internal line different from the bounder/ line, each internal line having a pair of opposite edges;
the OI structure comprises, for each internal line, variable-color ("VC") internal line-adjoining ("LA") structure extending to the surface at VC internal LA area largely adjoining one edge of that internal line at least partly along its length, each internal LA structure normally appearing along its LA area as a normal-state internal LA color;
each internal LA structure comprises a principal impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a principal color-change ("CC") component, an impact-dependent ("ID") segment of the IS
component responding to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area by providing a principal impact effect if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, an ID segment of the CC component responding to the impact effect, if provided, by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area largely as generic changed-state internal LA color materially different from the normal-state LA
color of that LA structure, the print area of that LA area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

135. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a color-change ("CC") controller and a sports-playing structure which comprises an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a sports instrument or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:
the surface comprises (a) an in-bounds ("IB") area defined by a closed boundary and (b) an out-of-bounds ("OB") area surrounding the IB area and adjoining it along the closed boundary, a closed boundary line extending along the closed boundary, the IB area having at least one finite-width internal line different from the boundary line, each internal line having a pair of opposite edges;

the OI structure comprises, for each internal line, variable-color ("VC") internal line-adjoining ("LA") structure extending to the surface at VC internal LA area largely adjoining one edge of that internal line at least partly along its length, each internal LA structure normally appearing along its LA area as a normal-state internal LA color;
an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of each internal LA structure responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area by providing a principal characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID
print area in that LA area and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact, the controller responding to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure and, if so, by providing a principal CC
initiation signal, the ID portion of that LA
structure responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area largely as generic changed-state internal LA color materially different from the normal-state internal LA
color of that LA structure, the print area of that LA area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

136. An IP structure as in Claim 135 wherein each internal LA structure in the OI structure comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a CC component, an ID segment of the IS
component responding to the object impacting the OC area of the LA area of that LA structure by providing the impact signal for that LA structure if the impact meets the threshold impact criteria of that LA structure, an ID
segment of the CC component responding to the initiation signal, if provided, for that LA structure by causing its ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area of that LA area largely as the changed-state LA color of that LA structure.

137. An IP structure as in Claim 135 wherein the print area of the LA area of each internal LA structure in the OI
structure meets one of two mutually exclusive location criteria for the location of that print area in that LA area, the location criteria consisting of (i) a first criterion that that print area adjoin the internal line largely adjoining that LA area and (ii) a second criterion that that print area be spaced apart from that internal line, the generic changed-state LA color of that LA area being implementable with different first and second specific changed-state LA colors respectively corresponding to the first and second location criteria for that LA area, the controller responding to the impact signal, if provided, for that LA structure by determining which location criterion for that LA area is met by that print area and, if the supplemental impact information for the impact meets the supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure, by providing its initiation signal at a condition corresponding to that location criterion, the ID portion of that LA structure responding to that initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along that print area largely as the specific changed-state LA color for that location criterion.

138. An IP structure as in Claim 135 wherein:
the sports-playing structure comprises a basketball-playing structure further including two baskets, the sports instrument being a basketball;
the closed boundary line comprises two opposite baselines and two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly the IB area, the baskets located above the IB area respectively close to the baselines, the IB area including two curved three-point ("3P") lines that respectively implement two such internal lines, each 3P line meeting a different one of the baselines at two locations spaced apart from the sidelines and having near and far edges respectively nearest to and farthest from the basket closest to the baseline meeting that 3P line, the selected edge of each such internal line being implemented with the far edge of the 3P line implementing that internal line;
two such internal LA structures are respectively implemented as two VC far-edge 3P LA structure portions respectively extending to the surface at two VC far-edge 3P LA area portions which respectively implement the internal LA areas of those two internal LA structures and which respectively largely adjoin the far edges of the 3P lines; and the supplemental impact criteria of each LA structure implemented as such a 3P
LA structure portion are characteristic of a person's shoe impacting the surface.

139. An IP structure as in Claim 135 wherein:
the sports-playing structure comprises a volleyball-playing structure further including a volleyball net, the sports instrument being a volleyball;
the closed boundary line comprises two opposite end lines and two opposite side lines extending between the end lines to define inwardly the IB area, a centerline line located substantially midway between the end lines and extending lengthwise between and beyond the side lines, the net situated above the centerline line so as to extend fully across the IB area and into the OB area, the 1B area including two attack lines that respectively implement two such internal lines, each attack line extending between the side lines at a location between the centerline and a different one of the baselines and having near and far edges respectively nearest to and farthest from the centerline, the selected edge of each such internal line being implemented with the far edge of the attack line implementing that internal line;
two such internal LA structures ae respectively implemented as two VC far-edge attack LA structure portions respectively extending to the surface at two VC far-edge attack LA
area portions which respectively implement the internal LA areas of those two internal LA structures and which respectively largely adjoin the far edges of the attack lines; and the supplemental impact criteria of each LA structure implemented as such an attack LA structure portion are characteristic of a person's shoe impacting the surface.

140. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a football-playing structure which comprises two pairs of goal posts and an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a football or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:
the surface comprises an in-bounds ("IB") area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") area surrounding the IB
area, the OB area having (a) two opposite end lines and (b) two opposite side lines extending between the end lines to define inwardly the IB area, each end or side line being an open boundary line having inside and outside edges respectively meeting the IB area and situated in the OB area, the pairs of goal posts respectively located close to the end lines;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") inside-edge end-line-adjoining ("ELA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC inside-edge ELA area parts situated in the IB area and respectively largely adjoining the inside edges of the end lines, (b) two VC
inside-edge side-line-adjoining ("SLA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC inside-edge SLA area parts situated in the IB area and respectively largely adjoining the inside edges of the side lines, (c) two VC end-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the end lines, and/or (d) two VC side-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the side lines, each ELA or SLA structure part being a VC line-adjoining ("LA") structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") color if that LA structure part is in the OI structure, each end-line or side-line structure part being a VC line structure part normally appearing along its open boundary line as an additional ("AD") color if that line structure part is in the OI structure;
an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of each LA structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the LA area part of that LA structure part at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area part by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area part largely as generic changed color materially different from the PP color of that LA
structure part if the impact meets PP
threshold impact criteria of that LA structure part, the print area of that LA
area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area:
and an ID portion of each line structure part in the OI structure responds to the object impacting its open boundary line at an ID OC area spanning where the object contacts that line by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that line largely as generic altered color materially different from the AD color of that line structure part if that impact meets AD threshold impact criteria of that line structure part, the print area of that line at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

141. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a color-change ("CC") controller and a football-playing structure which comprises two pairs of goal posts and an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a football or a person including any clothing worn by the person wherein:

the surface comprises an in-bounds ("IB") area and an out-of-bounds ("OB") area surrounding the IB
area, the OB area having (a) two opposite end lines and (b) two opposite side lines extending between the end lines to define inwardly the IB area, each end or side line being an open boundary line having inside and outside edges respectively meeting the IB area and situated in the OB area, the pairs of goal posts respectively located close to the end lines;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") inside-edge end-line-adjoining ("ELA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC inside-edge ELA area parts situated in the IB area and respectively largely adjoining the inside edges of the end lines, (b) two VC
inside-edge side-line-adjoining ("SLA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC inside-edge SLA area parts situated in the IB area and respectively largely adjoining the inside edges of the side lines, (c) two VC end-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the end lines, and/or (d) two VC side-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the side lines, each ELA or SLA structure part being a VC line-adjoining ("LA") structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") color if that LA structure part is in the OI structure, each end-line or side-line structure part being a VC line structure part normally appearing along its open boundary line as an additional ("AD") color if that line structure part is in the OI structure;
an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of each LA structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the LA area part of that LA structure part at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area part by providing a PP characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets PP threshold impact criteria of that LA structure part, the PP impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area part and PP general supplemental impact information for the impact, the controller responding to the PP impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the PP
supplemental impact information meets PP supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure part and, if so, by providing a PP CC initiation signal, the ID portion of that LA structure part responding to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area part largely as generic changed color materially different tom the PP color of that LA structure part, the print area of that LA area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC
area; and an ID portion of each line structure part in the OI structure responds to the object impacting its open boundary line at an ID OC area spanning where the object contacts that line by providing an AD characteristics-identifying impact signal if that impact meets AD threshold impact criteria of that line structure part, the AD
impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that line and AD general supplemental impact information for that impact, the controller responding to the AD impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the AD supplemental impact information meets AD supplemental impact criteria for that line structure part and, if so, by providing an AD CC initiation signal, the ID portion of that line structure part responding to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that line largely as generic altered color materially different from the AD color of that line structure part, the print area of that line at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

142. An IP structure as in Claim 140 or 141 wherein the four boundary lines are respectively situated on hard material of four paths.

143. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a ball-playing structure for playing baseball or softball, the ball-playing structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a baseball or softball wherein:
the surface comprises (a) a fair area defined inwardly by the barrier, a left foul line along which a third base is located, and a right foul line along which a first base is located, the foul lines respectively having fair-area portions which extend substantially perpendicular to each other in the fair area, which substantially meet an upward-extending outfield barrier, and which substantially meet at a home plate opposite a second base and (b) a foul area adjoining the fair area along the foul lines, the barrier having an inside barrier area which substantially meets the fair and foul areas, the foul lines also extending up the inside barrier area whereby the surface further includes the inside barrier area;
the fair area comprises a general infield area and a general outfield area both of which include portions of each foul line, the general infield area comprising a grass infield area and a dirt infield area which meets the grass infield area and in which the home plate and the three bases are located, the general outfield area extending to the barrier and comprising a grass outfield area which meets the dirt infield area;
the foul area comprises (a) two foul-territory ("FLT") dirt area sections extending from the home plate respectively along the foul lines beyond their bases partway to the barrier and (b) two FLT grass area sections respectively extending from the FLT dirt area sections along the foul lines at least partway to the barrier, a main outfield foul-line area part of each foul line extending from the dirt infield area at least partway to the barrier;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") main outfield-adjoining FLT line-adjoining ("LA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area parts respectively largely adjoining the main outfield foul-line area parts and/or (b) two VC main outfield foul-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the main outfield foul-line area parts, each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") outfield color if that LA structure part is in the OI structure, each main outfield foul-line structure part normally appearing along its foul-line area part as an additional ("AD") outfield color if that foul-line structure part is in the OI structure;
an impact-dependent (ID") portion of each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA
structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the LA area part of that LA
structure part at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA area part by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area part largely as generic changed outfield color materially different from the PP outfield color of that LA structure part if the impact meets threshold impact criteria of that LA structure part, the print area of that LA area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area; and an ID portion of each VC main outfield foul-line structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the foul-line area part of that foul-line structure part at an ID OC
area spanning where the object contacts that foul-line area part by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that foul-line area part largely as generic altered outfield color materially different from the AD outfield color of that foul-line structure part if that impact meets threshold impact criteria of that foul-line structure part, the print area of that foul-line area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

144. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising a color-change ("CC") controller and a ball-playing structure for playing baseball or softball, the ball-playing structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object comprising a baseball or softball wherein:
the surface comprises (a) a fair area defined inwardly by the barrier, a left foul line along which a third base is located, and a right foul line along which a first base is located, the foul lines respectively having fair-area portions which extend substantially perpendicular to each other in the fair area, which substantially meet an upward-extending outfield barrier, and which substantially meet at a home plate opposite a second base and (b) a foul area adjoining the fair area along the foul lines, the barrier having an inside barrier area which substantially meets the fair and foul areas, the foul lines also extending up the inside barrier area whereby the surface further includes the inside barrier area;
the fair area comprises a general infield area and a general outfield area both of which include portions of each foul line, the general infield area comprising a grass infield area and a dirt infield area which meets the grass infield area and in which the home plate and the three bases are located, the general outfield area extending to the barrier and comprising a grass outfield area which meets the dirt infield area;
the foul area comprises (a) two foul-territory ("FLT") dirt area sections extending from the home plate respectively along the foul lines beyond their bases partway to the barrier and (b) two FLT grass area sections respectively extending from the FLT dirt area sections along the foul lines at least partway to the barrier, a main outfield foul-line area part of each foul line extending from the dirt infield area at least partway to the barrier;
the OI structure comprises (a) two variable-color ("VC") main outfield-adjoining FLT line-adjoining ("LA") structure parts extending to the surface respectively at two VC main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area parts respectively largely adjoining the main outfield foul-line area parts and/or (b) two VC main outfield foul-line structure parts extending to the surface respectively at the main outfield foul-line area parts, each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure part normally appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") outfield color if that LA structure part is in the OI structure, each main outfield foul-line structure part normally appearing along its foul-line area part as an additional ("AD") outfield color if that foul-line structure part is in the OI structure;
an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA
structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the VC LA area part of that LA
structure part at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts that LA
area part by providing a PP

characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets PP threshold impact criteria of that LA structure part, the PP impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that LA area part and PP general supplemental impact information, the controller responding to the PP impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the PP supplemental impact information for the impact meets PP
supplemental impact criteria for that LA structure part and, if so, by providing a PP CC initiation signal, the ID
portion of that LA structure part responding to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of that LA area part largely as generic changed outfield color materially different from the PP
outfield color of that LA structure part, the print area of that LA area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area; and an ID portion of each VC main outfield foul-line structure part in the OI
structure responds to the object impacting the foul-line area part of that foul-line structure part at an ID OC
area spanning where the object contacts that foul-line part, by providing an AD characteristics-identifying impact signal if that impact meets AD
threshold impact criteria of that foul-line structure part, the AD impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in that foul-line area part and AD general supplemental impact information for the impact, the controller responding to the AD impact signal, if provided, by determining whether the AD supplemental impact information meets AD supplemental impact criteria for that foul-line structure part and, if so, by providing an AD
CC initiation signal, the ID portion of that foul-line structure part responding to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appear along an ID print area of that foul-line area part largely as generic altered ouffield color materially different from the AD outfield color of that foul-line structure part, the print area of that foul-line area part at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with its OC area.

145. An IP structure as in Claim 143 or 144 wherein two channels extend down to hard material along the foul lines from the grass infield area at least partway to the barrier.

146. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by a largely spherical object during an activity, the OI structure comprising:
a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the principal region responding to the object impacting the principal surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the principal surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID
print area of the principal surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC
area; and a secondary region which extends to the exposed surface at a secondary surface zone adjoining the principal surface zone and substantially fixedly appears along the secondary surface zone largely as a secondary color during the activity even when the secondary surface zone is impacted by the object, the object impacting each surface zone with an incident linear vector velocity and an incident angular vector velocity and rebounding from each surface zone with a rebound linear vector velocity and a rebound angular vector velocity, each surface zone having a coefficient of orthogonal velocity restitution and a ratio of tangential velocity restitution for the object impacting that surface zone, the coefficients of orthogonal velocity restitution differing by no more than 15% for the object separately impacting the surface zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity or/and the ratios of tangential velocity restitution differing by no more than 5% for the object separately impacting the surface zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity at a reference incident angle of approximately 16° to the exposed surface where the object impacts the exposed surface.

147. An IP structure as in Claim 146 wherein the principal region comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a color-change ("CC") component, an ID segment of the IS
component responding to the object impacting the OC area by providing an impact effect if that impact meets the threshold impact criteria, an ID
segment of the CC component responding to the impact effect, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area largely as the changed color.

148. An IP structure as in Claim 147 wherein the principal region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the principal surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the principal surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell temporarily appearing along its part of the principal surface zone largely as the changed color if the impact on the principal surface zone causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria.

149. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by a largely spherical object during an activity, the OI structure comprising:
(a) a principal variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a principal surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the principal region responding to the object impacting the principal surface zone at an ID
object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the principal surface zone by providing a principal general characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact meets principal threshold impact criteria, the impact signal identifying an expected location of an ID print area in the principal surface zone and principal general supplemental impact information for the impact; and (b) a secondary region which extends to the exposed surface at a secondary surface zone adjoining the principal surface zone and substantially fixedly appears along the secondary surface zone largely as a secondary color during the activity even when the secondary surface zone is impacted by the object, the object impacting each surface zone with an incident linear vector velocity and an incident angular vector velocity and rebounding from each surface zone with a rebound linear vector velocity and a rebound angular vector velocity, each surface zone having a coefficient of orthogonal velocity restitution and a ratio of tangential velocity restitution for the object impacting that surface zone, the coefficients of orthogonal velocity restitution differing by no more than 15% for the object separately impacting the surface zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity or/and the ratios of tangential velocity restitution differing by no more than 5% for the object impacting the surface zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and angular vector velocity at a reference incident angle of approximately 16° to the exposed surface where the object impacts the exposed surface; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets principal supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC initiation signal, the ID portion responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area.

150. An IP structure as in Claim 149 wherein the principal region comprises an impact-sensitive ("IS") component and a CC component, an ID segment of the IS component responding to the object impacting the OC area by providing the impact signal if the object impact meets the threshold impact criteria, an ID segment of a CC component responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area largely as the changed color.

151. An IP structure as in Claim 149 wherein:
the principal region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC
cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the principal surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the principal surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular characteristics-identifying impact signal if the impact of the object on the principal surface zone causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") cell, the cellular impact signal identifying cellular supplemental impact information for the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplemental impact information comprising the cellular supplemental impact information of that threshold CM cell and any other threshold CM cell; and the controller responds to the cellular impact signal of each threshold CM
cell by providing it with a cellular CC initiation signal that causes it to temporarily become a full CM
cell and temporarily appear along its part of the principal surface zone largely as the changed color if the general supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria.

152. An IP structure as in Claim 146 or 149 wherein the OI structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface has (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly an in-bounds playing area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, a backcourt of the in-bounds area defined by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts, the object being a tennis ball, the principal and secondary surface zones substantially respectively being (al) VC
backcourt area which comprises two elongated first area portions respectively partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines along largely their entire lengths and (a2) fixed-color ("FC") backcourt area which comprises two second area portions respectively partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the first area portions along largely their entire lengths or (b1) a VC line area comprising a selected one of the lines or part of the selected line and (b2) an FC line-adjoining area adjoining the VC line area.

153. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, an impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an ID object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of the surface zone largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the print area at least partly encompassing, at least mostly outwardly conforming largely to, and being largely concentric with the OC area;
object-tracking apparatus for tracking movement of the object over the exposed surface and for providing a tacking impact signal when the object impacts the surface zone according to the tracking; and an image-generating ("IG") system responsive to at least the impact signal for generating a print-area vicinity ("PAV") image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent area of the exposed surface.

154. An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein the IG system generates the PAV
image in substantially sole response to the impact signal.

155. An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein the IG system generates the PAV
image in joint response to the impact signal and instruction.

156. An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein:
the surface zone has a boundary;
the print area has a print area perimeter; and the IP structure provides an approximation capability for (a) determining a portion of the boundary where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that boundary portion as a smooth boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a portion thereof nearest the boundary, as a smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to determine if they meet or overlap, and (e) providing an indication of the comparison.

157. An IP structure as in Claim 156 wherein the IP structure generates a curve-approximation image containing the curves.

158. An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein the IP structure generates, potentially selectively as a function of the comparison, an audible sound in response to the impact signal, the sound indicating that the object has impacted the surface zone so as to produce the print area.

159. An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein the VC region comprises piezochromic, piezoluminescent, or/and piezochromic luminescent material.

160 An IP structure as in Claim 153 wherein the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC
cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell comprising an IS
part of the IS component and a CC part of the CC component, the IS part responding to the impact by providing a cellular impact effect if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria, the CC part of each cell meeting the cellular threshold impact criteria responding to that cell's impact effect by causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

161. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the LI impact signal identifying an ID threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") area where the impact meets the threshold impact criteria in the surface zone; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the LI impact signal, if provided, for providing a general CC initiation signal which designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger than the threshold CM area and at least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms largely to, and is largely concentric with the OC area, an ID portion of the VC region responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color.

162. An IP structure as in Claim 161 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular LI impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold CM cell such that there are multiple threshold CM cells; and the controller responds to the cellular LI impact signals, if provided, of the threshold CM cells by providing the CC initiation signal for defining the print area to consist largely of the parts of the surface zone of a group of CC cells comprising the threshold CM cells, each CC cell responding to the CC initiation signal by temporarily appearing along that CC cell's part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

163. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the 01 structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general characteristics-identifying ("CI") impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the CI impact signal identifying an ID threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") area where the impact meets the threshold impact criteria in the surface zone and general supplemental impact information for the impact; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to the CI impact signal, if provided, for determining whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, for providing a general CC
initiation signal which designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger than the threshold CM area and at least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms largely to, and is largely concentric with the OC area, an ID portion of the VC region responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color.

164. An IP structure as in Claim 163 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular CI impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold CM cell such that there are multiple threshold CM cells, the cellular CI impact signal of each threshold CM cell identifying cellular supplementary impact information of the object impacting the OC area as experienced at that threshold CM cell, the general supplementary impact information comprising the cellular supplementary impact information of the threshold CM cells; and the controller responds to the cellular CI impact signals, if provided, of the threshold CM cells by providing the CC initiation signal for defining the print area to consist largely of the parts of the surface zone of a group of CC cells comprising the threshold CM cells if the general supplementary impact information meets the supplementary impact criteria, each CC cell responding to the CC initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along that cell's part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

165. An information-presentation ("IP") structure comprising:
an object-impact ("OI") structure having an exposed surface for being impacted by an object during an activity, the OI structure comprising a variable-color ("VC") region which extends to the exposed surface at a surface zone and normally appears along it largely as a principal color during the activity, the VC region responding to the object impacting the surface zone at an impact-dependent ("ID") object-contact ("OC") area spanning where the object contacts the surface zone by providing a general location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the impact meets threshold impact criteria, the LI impact signal identifying an ID threshold criteria-meeting ("CM") area where the impact meets the threshold impact criteria in the surface zone;
object-tracking control apparatus for tracking movement of the object over the exposed surface; and a color-change ("CC") controller responsive to at least the LI impact signal, if provided, (a) for providing a general CC initiation signal which designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger than the threshold CM area and at least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms largely to, and is largely concentric with the OC area, an ID portion of the VC region responding to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as changed color materially different from the principal color if the tracked movement indicates that the object is expected to impact the OC
area or (b) for providing the initiation signal if the tracked movement indicates that the object impacted, or is expected to impact, the OC
area, the ID portion of the VC region then responding to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area largely as the changed color.

166. An IP structure as in Claim 165 wherein:
the VC region is at least partly allocated into a multiplicity of VC cells arranged laterally in a layer, each cell extending to a part of the surface zone, the cells normally appearing along their parts of the surface zone largely as the principal color during the activity, each cell providing a cellular LI impact signal if the impact causes that cell to meet cellular threshold impact criteria and temporarily become a threshold CM cell such that there are multiple threshold CM cells; and the controller responds to the cellular LI impact signals, if provided, of the threshold CM cells by providing the CC initiation signal for defining the print area to consist largely of the parts of the surface zone of a group of CC cells comprising the threshold CM cells, each CC cell responding to the CC initiation signal by temporarily appearing along that CC cell's part of the surface zone largely as the changed color.

167. An IP structure as in Claim 161, 163, or 1165 wherein the print area differs no more than 10% in area from the OC area at least if total ID area spanning where the object contacts the exposed surface during the impact is in the surface zone.

168. An IP structure as in Claim 1, 17, 24, 25, 29, 31, 34, 39, 41, 44, 47, 49, 59, 61, 65, 76, 82, 85, 87, 89, 104, 106, 109, 110, 113, 114, 117, 118, 153, 161, 163, or 165 wherein the 01 structure is incorporated into a tennis court for which the exposed surface has (a) two opposite baselines, (b) two opposite sidelines extending between the baselines to define inwardly an in-bounds playing area, (c) two opposite servicelines situated between the baselines and extending lengthwise between the sidelines, and (d) a centerline situated between the sidelines and extending lengthwise between the servicelines, a backcourt of the in-bounds area defined by each baseline, the sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two backcourts, the object being a tennis ball, the surface zone comprising VC backcourt area which comprises two VC backcourt area portions respectively partly occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the servicelines along largely their entire lengths.